Dell Configuration Guide for the S6010–ON System 9.14.1.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents 1 About this Guide...........................................................................................................................................37 Audience............................................................................................................................................................................37 Conventions.....................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Privilege Levels............................................................................................................................................ 61 Creating a Custom Privilege Level........................................................................................................................... 62 Removing a Command from EXEC Mode..............................................................................................................
Restoring Factory Default Environment Variables................................................................................................. 85 Viewing the Reason for Last System Reboot...............................................................................................................87 Disabling Syslog Messages for SNMP Authentication Failure Events.......................................................................87 5 802.1X...............................................................
Applying Egress Layer 3 ACLs (Control-Plane).................................................................................................... 120 IP Prefix Lists.................................................................................................................................................................. 120 Implementation Information.....................................................................................................................................
BGP global and address family configuration........................................................................................................180 Implement BGP with Dell EMC Networking OS...................................................................................................182 Configuration Information........................................................................................................................................185 Basic BGP configuration tasks.......................
Test CAM Usage............................................................................................................................................................ 244 View CAM Profiles......................................................................................................................................................... 244 View CAM-ACL Settings.............................................................................................................................................
Using PFC to Manage Converged Ethernet Traffic................................................................................................... 274 Operations on Untagged Packets................................................................................................................................ 274 Generation of PFC for a Priority for Untagged Packets........................................................................................... 275 Configure Enhanced Transmission Selection.........
Configuring Route Leaking between VRFs on DHCP Relay Agent.....................................................................311 Non-default VRF configuration for DHCPv6 helper address....................................................................................312 Configuring DHCP relay source interface....................................................................................................................312 Global DHCP relay source IPv4 or IPv6 configuration ...........................
Impact on Other Software Features......................................................................................................................337 FIP Snooping Restrictions...................................................................................................................................... 338 Configuring FIP Snooping.......................................................................................................................................
Important Points to Remember............................................................................................................................. 364 17 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)..............................................................................................365 Important Points to Remember................................................................................................................................... 365 Configure GVRP.....................................
Basic Interface Configuration.......................................................................................................................................389 Advanced Interface Configuration...............................................................................................................................389 Interface Types...............................................................................................................................................................
Choosing an Interface-Range Macro..................................................................................................................... 413 Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces........................................................................................................................ 413 Maintenance Using TDR..........................................................................................................................................414 Non Dell-Qualified Transceivers.
Specifying the Local System Domain and a List of Domains................................................................................... 445 Configuring DNS with Traceroute................................................................................................................................446 ARP.................................................................................................................................................................................
Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface........................................................................................................... 468 Assigning a Static IPv6 Route................................................................................................................................469 Configuring Telnet with IPv6..................................................................................................................................469 SNMP over IPv6......................
Debugging IS-IS....................................................................................................................................................... 503 IS-IS Metric Styles.........................................................................................................................................................504 Configure Metric Values..............................................................................................................................................
Enabling FEFD on an Interface.............................................................................................................................. 535 Debugging FEFD......................................................................................................................................................536 26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)..................................................................................................... 538 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview................
Anycast RP.....................................................................................................................................................................565 Implementation Information......................................................................................................................................... 566 Configure Multicast Source Discovery Protocol........................................................................................................
Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol................................................................................................................594 Related Configuration Tasks...................................................................................................................................595 Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally...................................................................................................................... 595 Adding and Removing Interfaces..
Configure the switch as a querier..........................................................................................................................632 Specify port as connected to multicast router.................................................................................................... 632 Enable Snooping Explicit Tracking......................................................................................................................... 633 Display the MLD Snooping Table..............
Configuring Passive-Interface................................................................................................................................ 674 Redistributing Routes.............................................................................................................................................. 674 Configuring a Default Route...................................................................................................................................
38 Port Monitoring.........................................................................................................................................711 Important Points to Remember..................................................................................................................................... 711 Port Monitoring...............................................................................................................................................................
DSCP Color Maps....................................................................................................................................................752 Create Policy Maps..................................................................................................................................................754 Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment....................................................................................................................................
Related Configuration Tasks....................................................................................................................................791 Important Points to Remember.................................................................................................................................... 791 RSTP and VLT..........................................................................................................................................................
VTY Line and Access-Class Configuration................................................................................................................. 844 VTY Line Local Authentication and Authorization............................................................................................... 844 VTY Line Remote Authentication and Authorization...........................................................................................845 VTY MAC-SA Filter Support........................................
47 sFlow........................................................................................................................................................881 Overview......................................................................................................................................................................... 881 Implementation Information..........................................................................................................................................
Viewing the Reason for Last System Reboot Using SNMP...............................................................................907 MIB Support for Power Monitoring.............................................................................................................................907 MIB Support to Display the Available Memory Size on Flash.................................................................................. 908 Viewing the Available Flash Memory Size.................................
Stack Master Election............................................................................................................................................. 934 Virtual IP................................................................................................................................................................... 935 Failover Roles.........................................................................................................................................................
Modifying Global Parameters....................................................................................................................................... 960 Modifying Interface STP Parameters...........................................................................................................................961 Enabling PortFast...........................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Tunnel source anylocal Decapsulation.................................................................................................... 991 Guidelines for Configuring Multipoint Receive-Only Tunnels....................................................................................991 Multipoint Receive-Only Tunnels..................................................................................................................................991 55 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD)...............
PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT..................................................................................................................... 1022 VLT Routing ........................................................................................................................................................... 1024 Non-VLT ARP Sync................................................................................................................................................ 1027 RSTP Configuration..
59 VLT Proxy Gateway.................................................................................................................................1081 Proxy Gateway in VLT Domains.................................................................................................................................. 1081 Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway................................................................................................ 1082 Enable VLT Proxy Gateway.......................
Configuring NSX-based VxLAN on VLT Peer Devices........................................................................................ 1114 Configuring VLT for NSX-based VxLAN............................................................................................................... 1115 Configuring and Controlling VXLAN from the NSX Controller GUI.................................................................. 1120 61 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF)...............................................
Troubleshoot an Over-temperature Condition..................................................................................................... 1181 Recognize an Under-Voltage Condition................................................................................................................ 1181 Troubleshoot an Under-Voltage Condition............................................................................................................1181 Buffer Tuning............................................
Configuring Revocation Behavior......................................................................................................................... 1215 Configuring OSCP responder preference............................................................................................................ 1215 Verifying certificates.....................................................................................................................................................
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell EMC Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S6000–ON platform is available with Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and beyond. Though this guide contains information about protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference.
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
The Dell EMC Networking OS CLI is divided into three major mode levels: • EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information. • EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations, clear counters, manage configuration files, run diagnostics, and enable or disable debug operations. The privilege level is 15, which is unrestricted.
PRIORITY-GROUP PROTOCOL GVRP QOS POLICY RSTP ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE SUPPORTASSIST TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP uBoot Navigating CLI Modes The Dell EMC Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command Interface Range DellEMC(conf-if-range)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Loopback Interface DellEMC(conf-if-lo-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Management Ethernet Interface DellEMC(conf-if-ma-1/1)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Null Interface DellEMC(conf-if-nu-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Port-channel Interface DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Tunnel Interface DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)# interface (INTERFACE modes) VLAN Interface DellEMC
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command TRACE-LIST DellEMC(conf-trace-acl)# ip trace-list CLASS-MAP DellEMC(config-class-map)# class-map CONTROL-PLANE DellEMC(conf-control-cpuqos)# control-plane-cpuqos DHCP DellEMC(config-dhcp)# ip dhcp server DHCP POOL DellEMC(config-dhcp-pool-name)# pool (DHCP Mode) ECMP DellEMC(conf-ecmp-group-ecmpgroup-id)# ecmp-group EIS DellEMC(conf-mgmt-eis)# management egress-interfaceselection FRRP DellEMC(conf-frrp-ring-id)# protocol frrp LLDP DellEMC(con
The do Command You can enter an EXEC mode command from any CONFIGURATION mode (CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, SPANNING TREE, and so on.) without having to return to EXEC mode by preceding the EXEC mode command with the do command. The following example shows the output of the do command.
Layer 2 protocols are disabled by default. To enable Layer 2 protocols, use the no disable command. For example, in PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode, enter no disable to enable Spanning Tree. Obtaining Help Obtain a list of keywords and a brief functional description of those keywords at any CLI mode using the ? or help command: • To list the keywords available in the current mode, enter ? at the prompt or after a keyword. • Enter ? after a command prompt to list all of the available keywords.
Short-Cut Key Combination Action CNTL-N Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with CTRL-P or the UP arrow key. CNTL-P Recalls commands, beginning with the last command. CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line. CNTL-Z Ends continuous scrolling of command outputs. Esc B Moves the cursor back one word. Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word.
The except keyword displays text that does not match the specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show system brief command. Example of the except Keyword DellEMC#show system brief | except 1 Stack MAC Reload-Type : 4c:76:25:e5:49:40 : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] The find keyword displays the output of the show command beginning from the first occurrence of specified text.
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell EMC Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
Console Access The device has one RJ-45/RS-232 console port, an out-of-band (OOB) Ethernet port, and a micro USB-B console port. Serial Console The RJ-45/RS-232 console port is labeled on the upper right-hand side, as you face the I/O side of the chassis. Figure 1. RJ-45 Console Port 1 2 RS-232 console port. USB port. Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter.
Pin Assignments You can connect to the console using a RJ-45 to RJ-45 rollover cable and a RJ-45 to DB-9 female DTE adapter to a terminal server (for example, a PC). The pin assignments between the console and a DTE terminal server are as follows: Table 2.
Accessing the System Remotely Configuring the system for remote access is a three-step process, as described in the following topics: 1 Configure an IP address for the management port. Configure the Management Port IP Address 2 Configure a management route with a default gateway. Configure a Management Route 3 Configure a username and password. Configure a Username and Password Configure the Management Port IP Address To access the system remotely, assign IP addresses to the management ports.
username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | {password | secret | sha256– password} [encryption-type] password [dynamic-salt]] [privilege level] [role role-name] – name: Enter a text string upto 63 characters long. – access-class access-list-name: Enter the name of a configured IP ACL. – nopassword: Allows you to configure an user without the password. – password: Allows you to configure an user with a password. – secret: Specify a secret string for an user.
– level: is the privilege level, is 15 by default, and is not required. – encryption-type: specifies how you input the password, is 0 by default, and is not required. ◦ 0 is to input the password in clear text. ◦ 5 is to input a password that is already encrypted using MD5 encryption method. Obtain the encrypted password from the configuration file of another device. ◦ 7 is to input a password that is already encrypted using DES encryption method.
Example of Importing a File to the Local System core1#$//copy ftp://myusername:mypassword@10.10.10.10//Dell/ Dell-EF-8.2.1.0.bin flash:// Destination file name [Dell-EF-8.2.1.0.bin.bin]: !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 26292881 bytes successfully copied Mounting an NFS File System This feature enables you to quickly access data on an NFS mounted file system. You can perform file operations on an NFS mounted file system using supported file commands.
Source file name []: test.c User name to login remote host: username Example of Logging in to Copy from NFS Mount DellEMC#copy nfsmount:///test flash: Destination file name [test]: test2 ! 5592 bytes successfully copied DellEMC# DellEMC#copy nfsmount:///test.txt ftp://10.16.127.35 Destination file name [test.txt]: User name to login remote host: username Password to login remote host: ! Example of Copying to NFS Mount DellEMC#copy flash://test.txt nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.
NOTE: When copying to a server, a host name can only be used if a DNS server is configured. NOTE: When you load the startup configuration or a configuration file from a network server such as TFTP to the running configuration, the configuration is added to the running configuration. This does not replace the existing running configuration. Commands in the configuration file has precedence over commands in the running configuration.
View Configuration Files Configuration files have three commented lines at the beginning of the file, as shown in the following example, to help you track the last time any user made a change to the file, which user made the changes, and when the file was last saved to the startup-configuration.
NOTE: The timestamps display format of the show command history output changes based on the service timestamps log datetime configuration. The time format can be in uptime, local time zone time or UTC time. If timestamp is disabled (no service timestamps log) then command history time format is shown with timestamp defaults (service timestamps log datetime localtime). To view the command-history trace, use the show command-history command.
[1d0h25m]: [1d0h25m]: [1d0h25m]: [1d0h25m]: Repeated 1 time. CMD-(CLI):[show clock]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show version]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console Example 4: no service timestamps log DellEMC(conf)#no service timestamps log DellEMC# show command-history - Repeated 1 time. [1d0h26m]: CMD-(CLI):[configure]by default from console - Repeated 1 time.
However, these changes are backward-compatible and do not affect existing behavior; meaning, you can still use the ip http sourceinterface command to communicate with a particular interface even if no VRF is configured on that interface NOTE: If the HTTP service is not VRF-aware, then it uses the global routing table to perform the look-up. To enable an HTTP client to look up the VRF table corresponding to either management VRF or any nondefault VRF, use the ip http vrf command in CONFIGURATION mode.
SHA256 DellEMC# verify sha256 flash://file-name Examples: Entering the Hash Value for Verification MD5 DellEMC# verify md5 flash://file-name 275ceb73a4f3118e1d6bcf7d75753459 SHA256 DellEMC# verify sha256 flash://file-name e6328c06faf814e6899ceead219afbf9360e986d692988023b749e6b2093e933 60 Getting Started
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell EMC Networking system.
Creating a Custom Privilege Level Custom privilege levels start with the default EXEC mode command set. You can then customize privilege levels 2-14 by: • restricting access to an EXEC mode command • moving commands from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode • restricting access A user can access all commands at his privilege level and below.
• removes the resequence command from EXEC mode by requiring a minimum of privilege level 4 • • moves the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size command from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode by requiring a minimum privilege level 3, which is the configured level for VTY 0 allows access to CONFIGURATION mode with the banner command • allows access to INTERFACE tengigabitethernet and LINE modes are allowed with no commands • Remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode.
DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/26/1)#? end exit DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/26/1)#exit DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)#line ? console vty DellEMC(conf)#line vty 0 DellEMC(config-line-vty)#exit DellEMC(conf)# Exit from configuration mode Exit from interface configuration mode Primary terminal line Virtual terminal Applying a Privilege Level to a Username To set the user privilege level, use the following command. • Configure a privilege level for a user.
• Disable console logging. CONFIGURATION mode no logging console Audit and Security Logs This section describes how to configure, display, and clear audit and security logs.
NOTE: If extended logging is disabled, you can only view system events, regardless of RBAC user role. Example of Enabling Audit and Security Logs DellEMC(conf)#logging extended Displaying Audit and Security Logs To display audit logs, use the show logging auditlog command in Exec mode. To view these logs, you must first enable the logging extended command. Only the RBAC system administrator user role can view the audit logs.
Figure 2. Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server Pre-requisites To configure a secure connection from the switch to the syslog server: 1 On the switch, enable the SSH server DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2 On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to the Dell OS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.
Log Messages in the Internal Buffer All error messages, except those beginning with %BOOTUP (Message), are log in the internal buffer.
• Configure a UNIX system as a syslog server by adding the following lines to /etc/syslog.conf on the UNIX system and assigning write permissions to the file. – Add line on a 4.1 BSD UNIX system. local7.debugging /var/log/ftos.log – Add line on a 5.7 SunOS UNIX system. local7.debugging /var/adm/ftos.log In the previous lines, local7 is the logging facility level and debugging is the severity level.
Display Login Statistics To view the login statistics, use the show login statistics command. Example of the show login statistics Command The show login statistics command displays the successful and failed login details of the current user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. DellEMC#show login statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
Example of the show login statistics user user-id command The show login statistics user user-id command displays the successful and failed login details of a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. DellEMC# show login statistics user admin -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
login concurrent-session limit number-of-sessions Example of Configuring Concurrent Session Limit The following example limits the permitted number of concurrent login sessions to 4. DellEMC(config)#login concurrent-session limit 4 Enabling the System to Clear Existing Sessions To enable the system to clear existing login sessions, follow this procedure: • Use the following command.
Enabling Secured CLI Mode The secured CLI mode prevents the users from enhancing the permissions or promoting the privilege levels. • Enter the following command to enable the secured CLI mode: CONFIGURATION Mode secure-cli enable After entering the command, save the running-configuration. Once you save the running-configuration, the secured CLI mode is enabled. If you do not want to enter the secured mode, do not save the running-configuration.
To view the logging buffer and configuration, use the show logging command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration. To view the logging configuration, use the show running-config logging command in privilege mode, as shown in the example for Configure a UNIX Logging Facility Level.
– auth (for authorization messages) – cron (for system scheduler messages) – daemon (for system daemons) – kern (for kernel messages) – local0 (for local use) – local1 (for local use) – local2 (for local use) – local3 (for local use) – local4 (for local use) – local5 (for local use) – local6 (for local use) – local7 (for local use) – lpr (for line printer system messages) – mail (for mail system messages) – news (for USENET news messages) – sys9 (system use) – sys10 (system use) – sys11 (system use) – sys12
• number: the range is from zero (0) to 8. • end-number: the range is from 1 to 8. You can configure multiple virtual terminals at one time by entering a number and an end-number. 2 Configure a level and set the maximum number of messages to print. LINE mode logging synchronous [level severity-level | all] [limit] Configure the following optional parameters: • level severity-level: the range is from 0 to 7. The default is 2. Use the all keyword to include all messages.
[May 17 15:43:08]: CMD-(CLI):[end]by default from console [May 17 15:43:16]: CMD-(CLI):[show logging]by default from console [May 17 15:43:22]: CMD-(CLI):[show command-history]by default from console DellEMC# DellEMC#show logging Syslog logging: enabled Console logging: disabled Monitor logging: level debugging Buffer logging: level debugging, 7 Messages Logged, Size (40960 bytes) Trap logging: level informational Last logging buffer cleared: May 17 15:38:38 May 17 15:43:08 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: C
DellEMC(conf)#service timestamps log uptime DellEMC#show clock 15:51:47.
File Transfer Services With Dell EMC Networking OS, you can configure the system to transfer files over the network using the file transfer protocol (FTP). One FTP application is copying the system image files over an interface on to the system; however, FTP is not supported on virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. If you want the FTP or TFTP server to use a VRF table that is attached to an interface, you must configure the FTP or TFTP server to use a specific routing table.
• Specify a user name for all FTP users and configure either a plain text or encrypted password. CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server username username password [encryption-type] password Configure the following optional and required parameters: – username: enter a text string. – encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. – password: enter a text string. NOTE: You cannot use the change directory (cd) command until you have configured ftp-server topdir.
Denying and Permitting Access to a Terminal Line Dell EMC Networking recommends applying only standard access control lists (ACLs) to deny and permit access to VTY lines. • Layer 3 ACLs deny all traffic that is not explicitly permitted, but in the case of VTY lines, an ACL with no rules does not deny traffic. • You cannot use the show ip accounting access-list command to display the contents of an ACL that is applied only to a VTY line.
exec-timeout 0 0 access-class testpermit ipv4 access-class testv6deny ipv6 ! Configuring Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can use any combination of up to six authentication methods to authenticate a user on a terminal line. A combination of authentication methods is called a method list. If the user fails the first authentication method, Dell EMC Networking OS prompts the next method until all methods are exhausted, at which point the connection is terminated.
Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode EXEC timeout is a basic security feature that returns Dell EMC Networking OS to EXEC mode after a period of inactivity on the terminal lines. To set timeout, use the following commands. • Set the number of minutes and seconds. The default is 10 minutes on the console and 30 minutes on VTY. Disable EXEC time out by setting the timeout period to 0. LINE mode • exec-timeout minutes [seconds] Return to the default timeout values.
login: admin DellEMC# Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell EMC Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time. You can lock CONFIGURATION mode so that only one user can be in CONFIGURATION mode at any time (Message 2). You can set two types of lockst: auto and manual. • Set auto-lock using the configuration mode exclusive auto command from CONFIGURATION mode. When you set autolock, every time a user is in CONFIGURATION mode, all other users are denied access.
Important Points to Remember • When you restore all the units in a stack, these units are placed in standalone mode. • When you restore a single unit in a stack, only that unit is placed in standalone mode. No other units in the stack are affected. • When you restore the units in standalone mode, the units remain in standalone mode after the restoration. • After the restore is complete, the units power cycle immediately.
1 Power-cycle the chassis (pull the power cord and reinsert it). 2 Press esc key to abort the boot process (while the system prompts to) You enter BLI immediately, as indicated by the BOOT_USER # prompt. press any key 3 Assign the new location of the Dell EMC Networking OS image to be used when the system reloads.
Viewing the Reason for Last System Reboot You can view the reason for the last system reboot. To view the reason for the last system reboot, follow this procedure: • Use the following command to view the reason for the last system reboot: EXEC or EXEC Privilege mode show reset-reason [stack-unit {unit-number | all}] Enter the stack-unit keyword and the stack unit number to view the reason for the last system reboot for that stack unit.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
Figure 4. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. • The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
Port-Authentication Process The authentication process begins when the authenticator senses that a link status has changed from down to up: 1 When the authenticator senses a link state change, it requests that the supplicant identify itself using an EAP Identity Request frame. 2 The supplicant responds with its identity in an EAP Response Identity frame.
Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell EMC Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.1X-triggered Access-Request messages: Attribute 31 Calling-station-id: relays the supplicant MAC address to the authentication server. Attribute 41 NAS-Port-Type: NAS-port physical port type. 15 indicates Ethernet. Attribute 61 NAS-Port: the physical port number by which the authenticator is connected to the supplicant.
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1 Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2 Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3 Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Examples of Verifying that 802.1X is Enabled Globally and on an Interface Verify that 802.
In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled. DellEMC#show running-config | find dot1x dot1x authentication ! [output omitted] ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! DellEMC# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. DellEMC#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 802.
• Configure the maximum number of times the authenticator re-transmits a Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x max-eap-req number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. The example in Configuring a Quiet Period after a Failed Authentication shows configuration information for a port for which the authenticator re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame after 90 seconds and re-transmits for 10 times.
Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port The 802.1X ports can be placed into any of the three states: • ForceAuthorized — an authorized state. A device connected to this port in this state is never subjected to the authentication process, but is allowed to communicate on the network. Placing the port in this state is same as disabling 802.1X on the port. • ForceUnauthorized — an unauthorized state.
dot1x reauthentication [interval] seconds The range is from 1 to 31536000. • The default is 3600. Configure the maximum number of times the supplicant can be re-authenticated. INTERFACE mode dot1x reauth-max number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. Example of Re-Authenticating a Port and Verifying the Configuration The bold lines show that re-authentication is enabled and the new maximum and re-authentication time period.
The default is 30. Example of Viewing Configured Server Timeouts The example shows configuration information for a port for which the authenticator terminates the authentication process for an unresponsive supplicant or server after 15 seconds. The bold lines show the new supplicant and server timeouts. DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1/1)#dot1x port-control force-authorized DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1/1)#do show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 802.
Figure 8. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1 Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration inDynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). 2 Make the interface a switchport so that it can be assigned to a VLAN. 3 Create the VLAN to which the interface will be assigned. 4 Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X.
The Guest VLAN 802.1X extension addresses this limitation with regard to non-802.1X capable devices and the Authentication-fail VLAN 802.1X extension addresses this limitation with regard to external users. • • If the supplicant fails authentication a specified number of times, the authenticator places the port in the Authentication-fail VLAN. If a port is already forwarding on the Guest VLAN when 802.1X is enabled, the port is moved out of the Guest VLAN and the authentication process begins.
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1/1)# Example of Viewing Configured Authentication View your configuration using the show config command from INTERFACE mode, as shown in the example in Configuring a Guest VLAN or using the show dot1x interface command from EXEC Privilege mode. 802.
6 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
Topics: • IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) • Important Points to Remember • IP Fragment Handling • Configure a Standard IP ACL • Configure an Extended IP ACL • Configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs • Assign an IP ACL to an Interface • Applying an IP ACL • Configure Ingress ACLs • Configure Egress ACLs • IP Prefix Lists • ACL Remarks • ACL Resequencing • Route Maps • Flow-Based Monitoring • Configuring IP Mirror Access Group IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell EMC Networking swi
CAM Usage The following section describes CAM allocation and CAM optimization. • User Configurable CAM Allocation • CAM Optimization User Configurable CAM Allocation Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs by using the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode. The CAM space is allotted in filter processor (FP) blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. (There are 16 FP blocks, but System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated.
If counters are enabled on ACL rules that are already configured, those counters are reset when a new rule which is inserted or prepended or appended requires a hardware shift in the flow table. Resetting the counters to 0 is transient as the proginal counter values are retained after a few seconds. If there is no need to shift the flow in the hardware, the counters are not affected.
DellEMC(config-std-nacl)#exit DellEMC(conf)#class-map match-all cmap1 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#match ip access-group acl1 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#exit DellEMC(conf)#class-map match-all cmap2 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#match ip access-group acl2 DellEMC(conf-class-map)#exit DellEMC(conf)#policy-map-input pmap DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in)#service-queue 7 class-map cmap1 DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in)#service-queue 4 class-map cmap2 DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface te 10/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-
Configured Route Map Examples The default action is permit and the default sequence number starts at 10. When you use the keyword deny in configuring a route map, routes that meet the match filters are not redistributed. To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTE-MAP mode.
Configure Route Map Filters Within ROUTE-MAP mode, there are match and set commands. • match commands search for a certain criterion in the routes. • set commands change the characteristics of routes, either adding something or specifying a level. When there are multiple match commands with the same parameter under one instance of route-map, Dell EMC Networking OS does a match between all of those match commands.
• Match routes whose next hop is a specific interface. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match interface interface The parameters are: – For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. – For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. – For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. – For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of match commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of match filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command. Configuring Set Conditions To configure a set condition, use the following commands. • Add an AS-PATH number to the beginning of the AS-PATH. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set as-path prepend as-number [...
To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of set commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of set filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command. Configure a Route Map for Route Redistribution Route maps on their own cannot affect traffic and must be included in different commands to affect routing traffic.
Continue Clause Normally, when a match is found, set clauses are executed, and the packet is then forwarded; no more route-map modules are processed. If you configure the continue command at the end of a module, the next module (or a specified module) is processed even after a match is found. The following example shows a continue clause at the end of a route-map module. In this example, if a match is found in the route-map “test” module 10, module 30 is processed.
DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl)#permit ip any 10.1.1.1/32 DellEMC(conf-ext-nacl) Layer 4 ACL Rules Examples The following examples show the ACL commands for Layer 4 packet filtering. Permit an ACL line with L3 information only, and the fragments keyword is present: If a packet’s L3 information matches the L3 information in the ACL line, the packet's FO is checked. • If a packet's FO > 0, the packet is permitted. • If a packet's FO = 0, the next ACL entry is processed.
A standard IP ACL uses the source IP address as its match criterion. 1 Enter IP ACCESS LIST mode by naming a standard IP access list. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard access-listname 2 Configure a drop or forward filter. CONFIG-STD-NACL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] [dscp] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] NOTE: When assigning sequence numbers to filters, keep in mind that you might need to insert a new filter.
ip access-list standard access-list-name 2 Configure a drop or forward IP ACL filter. CONFIG-STD-NACL mode {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] [dscp] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details.
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {ip-protocol-number | icmp | ip | tcp | udp} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator [portnumber | portname]] [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] While configuring an IP access list, you can choose to configure either by using the logical name of the protocol or by using the port number of the protocol. The logical names are available for both TCP and UDP.
NOTE: When assigning sequence numbers to filters, you may have to insert a new filter. To prevent reconfiguring multiple filters, assign sequence numbers in multiples of five or another number. The example below shows how the seq command orders the filters according to the sequence number assigned. In the example, filter 15 was configured before filter 5, but the show config command displays the filters in the correct order. DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#seq 15 deny ip host 112.45.0.
Configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs Both Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs may be configured on an interface in Layer 2 mode. If both L2 and L3 ACLs are applied to an interface, the following rules apply: • When Dell EMC Networking OS routes the packets, only the L3 ACL governs them because they are not filtered against an L2 ACL. • When Dell EMC Networking OS switches the packets, first the L3 ACL filters them, then the L2 ACL filters them.
ip address ip-address 3 Apply an IP ACL to traffic entering or exiting an interface. INTERFACE mode ip access-group access-list-name {in} [implicit-permit] [vlan vlan-range | vrf vrf-range] [layer3] NOTE: • The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification about entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. • 4 One of the usage scenarios is to avoid ACL being applied on the L2 traffic which comes in via ICL.
Example of Applying ACL Rules to Ingress Traffic and Viewing ACL Configuration To specify ingress, use the in keyword. Begin applying rules to the ACL with the ip access-list extended abcd command. To view the access-list, use the show command.
seq 10 deny icmp any any seq 15 permit 1.1.1.2 DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#interface te 1/2/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/1)#ip vrf forwarding blue DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/1 ip vrf forwarding blue no ip address shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/1)#end DellEMC# Applying Egress Layer 3 ACLs (Control-Plane) By default, packets originated from the system are not filtered by egress ACLs.
• To deny only /8 prefixes, enter deny x.x.x.x/x ge 8 le 8. • To permit routes with the mask greater than /8 but less than /12, enter permit x.x.x.x/x ge 8. • To deny routes with a mask less than /24, enter deny x.x.x.x/x le 24. • To permit routes with a mask greater than /20, enter permit x.x.x.x/x ge 20. The following rules apply to prefix lists: • A prefix list without any permit or deny filters allows all routes.
Example of Assigning Sequence Numbers to Filters If you want to forward all routes that do not match the prefix list criteria, configure a prefix list filter to permit all routes (permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32). The “permit all” filter must be the last filter in your prefix list. To permit the default route only, enter permit 0.0.0.0/0. The following example shows how the seq command orders the filters according to the sequence number assigned.
Viewing Prefix Lists To view all configured prefix lists, use the following commands. • Show detailed information about configured prefix lists. EXEC Privilege mode • show ip prefix-list detail [prefix-name] Show a table of summarized information about configured Prefix lists. EXEC Privilege mode show ip prefix-list summary [prefix-name] Examples of the show ip prefix-list Command The following example shows the show ip prefix-list detail command.
• Apply a configured prefix list to outgoing routes. You can specify an interface or type of route. If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded. CONFIG-ROUTER-RIP mode distribute-list prefix-list-name out [interface | connected | static | ospf] Example of Viewing Configured Prefix Lists (ROUTER RIP mode) To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode, or the show running-config rip command in EXEC mode.
with the same sequence number and different strings, the second one replaces the first string. You cannot configure two or more remarks with the same string and different sequence numbers. To remove a remark, use the no remark command with the remark string and with or without the sequence number. If there is a matching string, the system deletes the remark. Configuring a Remark To write a remark for an ACL, follow these steps: 1 Create either an extended IPv4 or IPv6 ACL.
Dell(config-ext-nacl)# seq 10 permit ip any any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#sh config ! ip access-list extended test remark 10 permit any ip seq 10 permit ip any any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#no remark 10 Dell(config-ext-nacl)#show config ! ip access-list extended test seq 10 permit ip any any ACL Resequencing ACL resequencing allows you to re-number the rules and remarks in an access or prefix list. The placement of rules within the list is critical because packets are matched against rules in sequential order.
resequence prefix-list {ipv4 | ipv6} {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment} Examples of Resequencing ACLs When Remarks and Rules Have the Same Number or Different Numbers Remarks and rules that originally have the same sequence number have the same sequence number after you apply the resequence command. The example shows the resequencing of an IPv4 access-list beginning with the number 2 and incrementing by 2.
Route Maps Although route maps are similar to ACLs and prefix lists in that they consist of a series of commands that contain a matching criterion and an action, route maps can modify parameters in matching packets. Implementation Information ACLs and prefix lists can only drop or forward the packet or traffic. Route maps process routes for route redistribution. For example, a route map can be called to filter only specific routes and to add a metric. Route maps also have an “implicit deny.
You must specify the monitor option with the permit, deny, or seq command for ACLs that are assigned to the source or the monitored port (MD) to enable the evaluation and replication of traffic that is traversing to the destination port. Enter the keyword monitor with the seq, permit, or deny command for the ACL rules to allow or drop IPv4, IPv6, ARP, UDP, EtherType, ICMP, and TCP packets.
Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring is supported on the platform. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. 1 Enable flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session.
A 0 Te 1/1/1 N/A Te 1/1/1 yes rx Flow N/A N/A 0 0 No N/ Configuring IP Mirror Access Group To configure an IP mirror access group on an interface, use the following commands: 1 Allocate CAM profile for IPv4 ACL.
Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended test Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit ip any any count monitor 65535 Dell(config-ext-nacl)#end Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ip mirror-access-group test acl5 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#end Example of viewing IP mirror–access–group applied to an Interface Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 no ip address ip mirror-access-group acl5 in shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# 132 Access Control Lists (ACLs)
7 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
Field Description Detection Multiplier The number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. Length The entire length of the BFD packet. My Discriminator A random number generated by the local system to identify the session. Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface.
Demand mode If one system requests Demand mode, the other system stops sending periodic control packets; it only sends a response to status inquiries from the Demand mode initiator. Either system (but not both) can request Demand mode at any time. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS supports Asynchronous mode only. A session can have four states: Administratively Down, Down, Init, and Up. State Description Administratively Down The local system does not participate in a particular session.
Figure 10.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
Configure BFD This section contains the following procedures. • Configure BFD for Static Routes • Configure BFD for OSPF • Configure BFD for OSPFv3 • Configure BFD for IS-IS • Configure BFD for BGP • Configure BFD for VRRP • Configuring Protocol Liveness Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol.
Viewing Physical Port Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role (active). Dell EMC Networking recommends maintaining the default values. To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Example of Viewing Session Parameters R1(conf-if-te-4/24/1)#bfd interval 100 min_rx 100 multiplier 4 role passive R1(conf-if-te-4/24/1)#do show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 2.2.2.
If the remote system state changes due to the local state administration being down, this message displays: R2>01:32:53: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Down for neighbor 2.2.2.1 on interface Te 1/1/1 (diag: 7) Configure BFD for Static Routes BFD offers systems a link state detection mechanism for static routes.
R1(conf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 Te 4/24/1 Up 200 200 4 R To view detailed session information, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes for Nondefault VRF You can also create nondefault VRFs and establish sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT - Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult VRF Clients * 13.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Te 1/1/2 Up 200 200 3 2 R * 23.1.1.1 23.1.1.2 Vl 300 Up 200 200 3 2 R * 33.1.1.1 33.1.1.2 Vl 301 Up 200 200 3 2 R Establishing Static Route Sessions on Specific Neighbors You can selectively enable BFD sessions on specific neighbors based on a destination prefix-list.
• If other destination prefixes in the prefix-list are pointing to the same neighbor, then the no permit or the deny option on a particular destination prefix neither creates a BFD session on a neighbor nor removes the static routes from the unicast database. • BFD sessions created using any one IP prefix list are active at any given point in time. If a new prefix list is assigned, then BFD sessions corresponding to the older (existing) prefix list are replaced with the newer ones.
Establishing Sessions for IPv6 Static Routes for Default VRF Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route on the default VRF. To establish a BFD session, use the following command. • Establish BFD sessions for all IPv6 neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
The following example shows that sessions are created for static routes for the default VRF.
Configure BFD for OSPF When you use BFD with OSPF, the OSPF protocol registers with the BFD manager. BFD sessions are established with all neighboring interfaces participating in OSPF. If a neighboring interface fails, the BFD agent notifies the BFD manager, which in turn notifies the OSPF protocol that a link state change has occurred. Configuring BFD for OSPF is a two-step process: 1 Enable BFD globally. 2 Establish sessions with OSPF neighbors.
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for the Default VRF BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Enable BFD globally.
INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors Example of Verifying Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 * 2.2.3.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1/1 Up 100 100 3 O 2.2.3.
B C I O O3 R M V VT - BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 10.1.3.2 RemoteAddr 10.1.3.1 Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Te 1/3/1 Up 300 250 3 C show bfd neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 5.1.1.1 RemoteAddr 5.1.1.2 Interface Po 30 State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Up 200 200 3 Clients O * 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 Vl 30 Up 200 200 3 O * 7.
* 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 Vl 30 Up 200 200 3 255 O * 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 Te 1/1/1 Up 200 200 3 255 O The following example shows the show bfd vrf neighbors detail command output showing the nondefault VRF called “VRF_blue”. show bfd vrf VRF_blue neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 5 Neighbor Discriminator: 3 Local Addr: 5.1.1.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:a0:c9:00:00:02 Remote Addr: 5.1.1.
Configured parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Neighbor parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Actual parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Role: Active Delete session on Down: True VRF: VRF_blue Client Registered: OSPF Uptime: 00:00:14 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 73 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 73 Number of state changes: 1 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 4 DellEMC#
ip ospf bfd all-neighbors interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Disabling BFD for OSPF If you disable BFD globally, all sessions are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. If you disable BFD on an interface, sessions on the interface are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state.
The following example shows the show bfd neighbors command output for default VRF. DellEMC#show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down B - BGP C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF O3 - OSPFv3 R - Static Route (RTM) M - MPLS V - VRRP VT - Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 1.1.1.1 RemoteAddr 1.1.1.2 Interface Te 1/21/3 State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Up 200 200 3 O * 2.1.1.1 2.1.1.
Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT - Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr Clients * 10.1.1.1 511 O RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult VRF 10.1.1.2 Vl 100 Up 150 150 3 * 11.1.1.1 511 O 11.1.1.2 Vl 101 Up 150 150 3 * 12.1.1.1 511 O 12.1.1.2 Vl 102 Up 150 150 3 * 13.1.1.1 511 O 13.1.1.
Disabling BFD for OSPFv3 If you disable BFD globally, all sessions are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. If you disable BFD on an interface, sessions on the interface are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. Disabling BFD does not trigger a change in BFD clients; a final Admin Down packet is sent before the session is terminated. To disable BFD sessions, use the following commands. • Disable BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors.
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. ROUTER-ISIS mode • bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
For example, the following illustration shows a sample BFD configuration on Router 1 and Router 2 that use eBGP in a transit network to interconnect AS1 and AS2. The eBGP routers exchange information with each other as well as with iBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility within each autonomous system. Figure 15.
Prerequisites Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure the following settings: • Configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors for Default VRF To establish sessions with either IPv6 or IPv4 BGP neighbors for the default VRF, follow these steps: 1 Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable 2 Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#address-family ipv6 unicast DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)#neighbor 20::2 activate DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)#exit DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#bfd all-neighbors DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 1 neighbor 10.1.1.2 remote-as 2 neighbor 10.1.1.
9 Activate the neighbor in IPv6 address family. CONFIG-ROUTERBGPv6_ADDRESSFAMILY mode neighbor ipv6-address activate 10 Configure parameters for a BFD session established with all neighbors discovered by BGP. Or establish a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor or peer group using the default BFD session parameters. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode bfd all-neighbors DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)#neighbor 10.1.1.
• Verify a BFD for BGP configuration. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config bgp • Verify that a BFD for BGP session has been successfully established with a BGP neighbor. A line-by-line listing of established BFD adjacencies is displayed. EXEC Privilege mode • show bfd neighbors [interface] [detail] Check to see if BFD is enabled for BGP connections. EXEC Privilege mode • show ip bgp summary Displays routing information exchanged with BGP neighbors, including BFD for BGP sessions.
Remote MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:8a:da:7b Int: TenGigabitEthernet 6/1/1 State: Up Configured parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Neighbor parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Actual parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Role: Active Delete session on Down: True Client Registered: BGP Uptime: 00:07:55 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 4762 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 4490 Number of state changes: 2 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Nu
• Message displays when you enable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor using the neighbor ip-address bfd command. • Message displays when you enable a BGP neighbor in a peer group for which you enabled a BFD session using the neighbor peergroup-name bfd command R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.2 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.2, remote AS 1, external link BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.
Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM). BFD sessions are established with all neighboring interfaces participating in VRRP. If a neighboring interface fails, the BFD agent on the line card notifies the BFD manager, which in turn notifies the VRRP protocol that a link state change occurred. Configuring BFD for VRRP is a three-step process: 1 Enable BFD globally. Refer to Enabling BFD Globally.
Establishing VRRP Sessions on VRRP Neighbors The master router does not care about the state of the backup router, so it does not participate in any VRRP BFD sessions. VRRP BFD sessions on the backup router cannot change to the UP state. Configure the master router to establish an individual VRRP session the backup router. To establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor, use the following command. • Establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor.
INTERFACE mode vrrp bfd all-neighbors interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] • Change parameters for a particular VRRP session. INTERFACE mode vrrp bfd neighbor ip-address interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Disabling BFD for VRRP If you disable any or all VRRP sessions, the sessions are torn down.
8 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an interdomain routing protocol that manages routing between edge routers. BGP uses an algorithm to exchange routing information between switches enabled with BGP. BGP determines a path to reach a particular destination using certain attributes while avoiding routing loops. BGP selects a single path as the best path to a destination network or host. You can also influence BGP to select different path by altering some of the BGP attributes.
connections from one network to another. The ISP is considered to be “selling transit service” to the customer network, so thus the term Transit AS. The devices within an AS (AS1 or AS2, as seen in the following illustration) exchange routing information using Internal BGP (IBGP), whereas the devices in different AS communicate using External BGP (EBGP). IBGP provides routers inside the AS with the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS.
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. AS4 Number Representation Dell EMC Networking OS supports multiple representations of 4-byte AS numbers: asplain, asdot+, and asdot. NOTE: The ASDOT and ASDOT+ representations are supported only with the 4-Byte AS numbers feature. If 4-Byte AS numbers are not implemented, only ASPLAIN representation is supported.
ASDOT+ representation splits the full binary 4-byte AS number into two words of 16 bits separated by a decimal point (.): .. Some examples are shown in the following table. • • All AS numbers between 0 and 65535 are represented as a decimal number, when entered in the CLI and when displayed in the show commands outputs. AS Numbers larger than 65535 is represented using ASDOT notation as ..
router bgp 100 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057
Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies. In order to make decisions in its operations with other BGP peers, a BGP process uses a simple finite state machine that consists of six states: Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm, and Established. For each peer-to-peer session, a BGP implementation tracks which of these six states the session is in.
• Next Hop NOTE: There are no hard coded limits on the number of attributes that are supported in the BGP. Taking into account other constraints such as the Packet Size, maximum number of attributes are supported in BGP. Communities BGP communities are sets of routes with one or more common attributes. Communities are a way to assign common attributes to multiple routes at the same time. NOTE: Duplicate communities are not rejected.
Best Path Selection Details 1 Prefer the path with the largest WEIGHT attribute. 2 Prefer the path with the largest LOCAL_PREF attribute. 3 Prefer the path that was locally Originated via a network command, redistribute command or aggregate-address command. a 4 Routes originated with the Originated via a network or redistribute commands are preferred over routes originated with the aggregate-address command.
Weight The weight attribute is local to the router and is not advertised to neighboring routers. If the router learns about more than one route to the same destination, the route with the highest weight is preferred. The route with the highest weight is installed in the IP routing table. Local Preference Local preference (LOCAL_PREF) represents the degree of preference within the entire AS. The higher the number, the greater the preference for the route.
One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path. For this example, assume the MED is the only attribute applied. In the following illustration, AS100 and AS200 connect in two places. Each connection is a BGP session. AS200 sets the MED for its T1 exit point to 100 and the MED for its OC3 exit point to 50. This sets up a path preference through the OC3 link. The MEDs are advertised to AS100 routers so they know which is the preferred path.
Network *> 7.0.0.0/29 *> 7.0.0.0/30 *> 9.2.0.0/16 Next Hop 10.114.8.33 10.114.8.33 10.114.8.33 Metric 0 0 10 LocPrf 0 0 0 Weight 18508 18508 18508 Path ? ? 701 i AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through. The local AS number is added by the BGP speaker when advertising to a EBGP neighbor. NOTE: Any update that contains the AS path number 0 is valid. The AS path is shown in the following example.
MBGP allows information about the topology of the IP multicast-capable routers to be exchanged separately from the topology of normal IPv4 and IPv6 unicast routers. It allows a multicast routing topology different from the unicast routing topology. MBGP uses either an IPv4 address configured on the interface (which is used to establish the IPv6 session) or a stable IPv4 address that is available in the box as the next-hop address.
Example of BGP configuration command levels Following is an example configuration, which explains the neighbor configuration for all the address families. Also, the configuration shows how to create address families (IPv4 and IPv6) and activate the neighbors in the address family. DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 10 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 20.20.20.1 remote-as 200 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 20.20.20.
Implement BGP with Dell EMC Networking OS The following sections describe how to implement BGP on Dell EMC Networking OS. Additional Path (Add-Path) Support The add-path feature reduces convergence times by advertising multiple paths to its peers for the same address prefix without replacing existing paths with new ones. By default, a BGP speaker advertises only the best path to its peers for a given address prefix.
Ignore Router-ID in Best-Path Calculation You can avoid unnecessary BGP best-path transitions between external paths under certain conditions. The bgp bestpath routerid ignore command reduces network disruption caused by routing and forwarding plane changes and allows for faster convergence. AS Number Migration With this feature you can transparently change the AS number of an entire BGP network and ensure that the routes are propagated throughout the network while the migration is in progress.
3 Prepend "65001 65002" to as-path. Local-AS is prepended before the route-map to give an impression that update passed through a router in AS 200 before it reached Router B. BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances support for BGP management information base (MIB) with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05. To see these enhancements, download the MIB from the Dell website.
• Multiple BPG process instances are not supported. Thus, the f10BgpM2PeerInstance field in various tables is not used to locate a peer. • Multiple instances of the same NLRI in the BGP RIB are not supported and are set to zero in the SNMP query response. • The f10BgpM2NlriIndex and f10BgpM2AdjRibsOutIndex fields are not used. • Carrying MPLS labels in BGP is not supported. The f10BgpM2NlriOpaqueType and f10BgpM2NlriOpaquePointer fields are set to zero. • 4-byte ASN is supported.
Restrictions Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one BGP routing configuration and autonomous system (AS), but supports multiple address family configuration. Enabling BGP By default, BGP is disabled on the system. Dell EMC Networking OS supports one autonomous system (AS) and assigns the AS number (ASN). To enable the BGP process and begin exchanging information, assign an AS number and use commands in ROUTER BGP mode to configure a BGP neighbor.
Example configuration steps to enable BGP NOTE: When you change the configuration of a BGP neighbor, always reset it by entering the clear ip bgp * command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the BGP configuration, enter show config in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view the BGP status, use the show ip bgp summary command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows that the summary with a 2-byte AS number using the show ip bgp summary command.
Last read 00:00:00, Last write 00:00:07 Hold time is 90, keepalive interval is 30 seconds Received 18 messages, 0 in queue 7 opens, 6 notifications, 0 updates 5 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Sent 26 messages, 0 in queue 7 opens, 0 notifications, 0 updates 19 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Route refresh request: received 0, sent messages 0 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP local RIB : R
Changing a BGP router ID BGP uses the configured router ID to identify the devices in the network. By default, the router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface. If no Loopback interfaces are configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router is used as the BGP router ID. To change the default BGP router ID, use the following command. • Change the BGP router ID of a BGP router ROUTER BGP mode bgp router-id ip-address ip-address- IP address in dotted decimal format.
• Enable ASPLAIN AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asplain • NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell EMC Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot • Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot+ Examples of the bgp asnotation Commands The following example shows the bgp asnotation asplain command output.
Configuring a BGP peer To configure a BGP neighbor or peer, you must provide the IP address and the AS number of each neighbor since BGP does not discover the neighbor or peer. Neighbors that are present with the same AS communicate using IBGP while the neighbors that are present in different AS communicate using EBGP. To allow the neighbor to establish a BGP session, you have to enable the neighbor by providing neighbor no shutdown command. To configure BGP between two peers, use the following commands.
Example-Configuring BGP routing between peers The following example show how BGP is configured between two peers. Figure 23. BGP topology with two AS To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes. Example-Configuring BGP routing between peers Example of enabling BGP in Router A Following is an example to enable BGP configuration in the router A.
Following is the sample output for show ip bgp summary command for Router B. RouterB#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 172.17.1.99, local 45000 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 1 neighbor(s) using 40960 bytes of memory Neighbor 192.168.1.2 AS 40000 MsgRcvd 10 MsgSent 20 TblVer 0 InQ 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:06:11 0 BGP peer group To configure multiple BGP neighbors at one time, create and populate a BGP peer group.
3 Enable the peer group. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown By default, all peer groups are disabled. 4 Create a BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address} remote-as as-number 5 Enable the neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address} no shutdown NOTE: You can use neighbor shutdown command to disable a BGP neighbor or a peer group. 6 Add an enabled neighbor to the peer group.
To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. When you create a peer group, it is disabled (shutdown). The following example shows the creation of a peer group (zanzibar) (in bold). To enable a peer group, use the neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown command.
Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/32 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 1/21/1 R1(conf-if-te-1/21/1)#ip address 10.0.1.21/24 R1(conf-if-te-1/21/1)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21/1)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 1/21 ip address 10.0.1.
R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.33 remote 100 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.33 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 10.0.3.33 no shutdown neighbor 10.0.3.33 remote-as 100 Example of Enabling BGP (Router 2) R2# conf R2(conf)#int loop 0 R2(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.
! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/21/1 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)# R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.31 remote 99 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.31 no shut R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.2.2 remote 99 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.2.2 no shut R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 neighbor 10.0.3.31 remote 99 neighbor 10.0.3.31 no shut neighbor 10.0.2.
R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.3 peer BBB R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.3 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor BBB peer-group neighbor BBB no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.1 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.1 peer-group CCC neighbor 192.168.128.1 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.
Route-refresh and Soft-reconfiguration BGP soft-reconfiguration allows for faster and easier route changing. Changing routing policies typically requires a reset of BGP sessions (the TCP connection) for the policies to take effect. Such resets cause undue interruption to traffic due to hard reset of the BGP cache and the time it takes to re-establish the session. BGP soft-reconfiguration allows for policies to be applied to a session without clearing the BGP Session.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.108.1.1 soft-reconfiguration inbound DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit Route-refresh This section explains how the soft-reconfiguration and route-refresh works. Soft-reconfiguration has to be configured explicitly for a neighbor unlike route refresh, which is automatically negotiated between BGP peers when establishing a peer session.
In the below example, under the IPv6 address family configuration, only the IPv6 neighbor is enabled using neighbor ipv6–address activate command. If you execute, clear ip bgp neighbor-ipv4–address soft in command, only the IPv4 route-refresh update is sent. If you execute clear ip bgp neighbor-ipv6–address soft incommand, both the IPv4 and IPv6 route-refresh updates are sent.
reducing the convergence time. You can configure BGP to configure and advertise aggregated routes. At least one specific route of the aggregate must be in the routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. To aggregate routes, use the following command. AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included in the aggregated route. • Assign the IP address and mask of the prefix to be aggregated.
Suppressing BGP aggregate routes The routes that are suppressed are not advertised to any of the BGP neighbors. You can suppress the aggregate routes using the suppress-map or summary-only options in the aggregate-address configuration. To suppress the advertisement of the aggregate routes using BGP, use the following commands. • Create an aggregate entry and suppress the advertisement of specific routes to all neighbors.
Regular Expressions as Filters Regular expressions are used to filter AS paths or community lists. A regular expression is a special character used to define a pattern that is then compared with an input string. For an AS-path access list, as shown in the previous commands, if the AS path matches the regular expression in the access list, the route matches the access list. The following lists the regular expressions accepted in Dell EMC Networking OS.
DellEMC(config-as-path)#ex DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 99 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor AAA filter-list Eagle in DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA filter-list Eaglein neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 filter-list 1 in neighbor 10.155.15.
ip prefix-list prefix-name 2 Create multiple prefix list filters with a deny or permit action. CONFIG-PREFIX LIST mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | ip-prefix [ge | le] } • ge: minimum prefix length to be matched. • le: maximum prefix length to me matched. For information about configuring prefix lists, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-PREFIX LIST mode exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode.
Filtering BGP Routes Using Route Maps To filter routes using a route map, use these commands. 1 Create a route map and assign it a name. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2 Create multiple route map filters with a match or set action. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode {match | set} For information about configuring route maps, see Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode.
Filtering on an AS-Path Attribute You can use the BGP attribute, AS_PATH, to manipulate routing policies. The AS_PATH attribute contains a sequence of AS numbers representing the route’s path. As the route traverses an AS, the ASN is prepended to the route. You can manipulate routes based on their AS_PATH to affect interdomain routing. By identifying certain ASN in the AS_PATH, you can permit or deny routes based on the number in its AS_PATH. AS-PATH ACLs use regular expressions to search AS_PATH values.
20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 --More-- 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 64801 i i i i i i i i i i Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1 Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map.
To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view which BGP routes meet an IP community or IP extended community list’s criteria, use the show ip bgp {community-list | extcommunity-list} command in EXEC Privilege mode. Configuring BGP Fast Fall-Over By default, a BGP session is governed by the hold time.
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) fall-over enabled Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 52, neighbor version 52 4 accepted prefixes consume 16 bytes Prefix advertised 0, denied 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 6; dropped 5 Last reset 00:19:37, due to Reset by peer Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 5 Recv: 0 Local host: 20.20.20.2, Local port: 65519 Foreign host: 10.10.10.
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive limit Enter the limit keyword to restrict the number of sessions accepted. 2 Assign a subnet to the peer group. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask The peer group responds to OPEN messages sent on this subnet. 3 Enable the peer group. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown 4 Create and specify a remote peer for BGP neighbor.
• Enable graceful restart for the BGP node. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart • Set maximum restart time, in seconds, to restart and bring-up all the peers. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [restart-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 120 seconds. Set maximum time, in seconds, to retain the restarting peer’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 360 seconds.
– metric value: The value is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. – route-map map-name: Specify the name of a configured route map to be consulted before adding the ISIS route. • Include specific OSPF routes into BGP. ROUTER BGP or CONF-ROUTER_BGPv6_ AF mode redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: – ospf: Indicates that you are redistributing OSPF routes in BGP.
Example configuration for enabling additional paths DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 500 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp add-path both 2 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# address-family ipv4 multicast DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# neighbor 10.10.10.1 activate DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# neighbor 10.10.10.
deny 701:20 deny 702:20 deny 703:20 deny 704:20 deny 705:20 deny 14551:20 deny 701:112 deny 702:112 deny 703:112 deny 704:112 deny 705:112 deny 14551:112 deny 701:667 deny 702:667 deny 703:667 deny 704:666 deny 705:666 deny 14551:666 DellEMC# Configuring an IP Extended Community List To configure an IP extended community list, use these commands. 1 Create a extended community list and enter the EXTCOMMUNITY-LIST mode.
deny 703:667 deny 704:666 deny 705:666 deny 14551:666 DellEMC# Configure BGP attributes Following sections explain how to configure the BGP attributes such as MED, COMMUNITY, WEIGHT, and LOCAL_PREFERENCE. Changing MED Attributes By default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses the MULTI_EXIT_DISC or MED attribute when comparing EBGP paths received from different BGP neighbors or peers from the same AS for the same route.
If you want to remove or add a specific COMMUNITY number from a BGP path, you must create a route map with one or both of the following statements in the route map. Then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1 Enter ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2 Configure a set filter to delete all COMMUNITY numbers in the IP community list.
*>i 6.1.0.0/16 *>i 6.2.0.0/22 *>i 6.3.0.0/18 *>i 6.4.0.0/16 *>i 6.5.0.0/19 *>i 6.8.0.0/20 *>i 6.9.0.0/20 *>i 6.10.0.0/15 *>i 6.14.0.0/15 *>i 6.133.0.0/21 *>i 6.151.0.0/16 --More-- 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 205.171.0.
router bgp as-number 5 Apply the route-map to the neighbor or peer group’s incoming or outgoing routes. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out} Example configuration for manipulating the LOCAL_PREFERENCE attribute DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# route-map route1 permit 10 DellEMC(conf-route-map)# set local-preference 140 DellEMC(conf-route-map)# exit DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.
• Sets weight for the route. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set weight weight weight: the range is from 0 to 65535. NOTE: The weight assigned using the set weight command under route map configuration override the weight assigned using the neighbor weight command. Example configuration for changing the WEIGHT attribute DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 500 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.
Route Reflectors Route reflectors reorganize the iBGP core into a hierarchy and allow some route advertisement rules. NOTE: Do not use route reflectors (RRs) in the forwarding path. In iBGP, hierarchal RRs maintaining forwarding plane RRs could create routing loops. Route reflection divides iBGP peers into two groups: client peers and nonclient peers. A route reflector and its client peers form a route reflection cluster.
bgp cluster-id ip-address | number – ip-address: IP address as the route reflector cluster ID. – number: A route reflector cluster ID as a number from 1 to 4294967295. • You can have multiple clusters in an AS. When a BGP cluster contains only one route reflector, the cluster ID is the route reflector’s router ID. For redundancy, a BGP cluster may contain two or more route reflectors.
Enter the following optional parameters to configure route dampening parameters: – half-life: the range is from 1 to 45. Number of minutes after which the Penalty is decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty is decreased by half after the half-life period expires. The default is 15 minutes. – reuse: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value.
The following example shows how to configure values to reuse or restart a route. In the following example, default = 15 is the set time before the value decrements, bgp dampening 2 ? is the set re-advertise value, bgp dampening 2 2000 ? is the suppress value, and bgp dampening 2 2000 3000 ? is the time to suppress a route. Default values are also shown.
• – holdtime: Time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive message and declaring the BGP peer is dead. The range is from 3 to 65536. The default is 180 seconds. Configure timer values for all neighbors. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode timers bgp keepalive holdtime – keepalive: Time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent to the neighbor routers. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60 seconds.
Enabling or disabling BGP neighbors You can enable or disable all the configured BGP neighbors using the shutdown all command in ROUTER BGP mode. To disable all the configured BGP neighbors: 1 Enter the router bgp mode using the following command: CONFIGURATION Mode router bgp as-number 2 In ROUTER BGP mode, enter the following command: ROUTER BGP Mode shutdown all You can use the no shutdown all command in the ROUTER BGP mode to re-enable all the BGP interface.
When you use the shutdown all command in global configuration mode, this command takes precedence over the shutdown address-family-ipv4-unicast, shutdown address-family-ipv4-multicast, and shutdown address-familyipv6-unicast commands. Irrespective of whether the BGP neighbors are disabled earlier, the shutdown all command brings down all the configured BGP neighbors. When you issue the no shutdown all command, all the BGP neighbor neighbors are enabled.
confederations appear as one AS. Within the confederation sub-AS, the IBGP neighbors are fully meshed and the MED, NEXT_HOP, and LOCAL_PREF attributes are maintained between confederations. To configure BGP confederations, use the following commands. • Specifies the confederation ID. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp confederation identifier as-number – as-number: from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte). • Specifies which confederation sub-AS are peers.
Example of configuring both IPv4 and IPv6 VRF address families The following are the sample steps performed to configure a VRF, and VRF address families for IPv4 (unicast and multicast) and IPv6. DellEMC(conf)# ip vrf vrf1 DellEMC(conf-vrf)# exit DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 100 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# neighbor 50.0.0.2 remote-as 200 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp_af)# neighbor 50.0.0.
– peer-group-name: 16 characters. – AS-number: 0 to 65535 (2-Byte) or 1 to 4294967295 (4-Byte) or 0.1 to 65535.65535 (Dotted format). – No Prepend: specifies that local AS values are not prepended to announcements from the neighbor. Format: IPv4 Address: A.B.C.D and IPv6 address: X:X:X:X::X. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. This feature is not supported on passive peer groups.
To disable this feature, use the no neighbor allow-as in number command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list Laura in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.
Configuring IPv6 MBGP between peers To configure IPv6 MBGP, use the following commands. Following are the steps to configure IPv6 MBGP between two peers. The neighbors that are configured using neighbor remote-as command exchange only the IPv4 unicast address prefixes. In order to exchange IPv6 address prefixes, you have to activate the neighbors using neighbor activate command inside the address-family configuration.
Example-Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors The following example configurations show how to enable BGP and set up some peer under IPv4 and IPv6 address families. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes.
30.30.30.1 2001::2 20 200 0 40 0 45 0 0 0 0 0 00:00:00 0 0 00:03:14 0 The same output will be displayed when using show ip bgp ipv4 unicast summary command. Following is the sample output of show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary command. R1# show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary BGP router identifier 1.1.1.1, local AS number 10 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 1 neighbor(s) using 24576 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.
Following is the output of show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command for the above configuration example. R2#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary BGP router identifier 2.2.2.2, local AS number 200 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 2 neighbor(s) using 24576 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)# neighbor 10.1.1.2 activate DellECM(conf-router_bgpv6_af)# exit Configuring the auto-local-address for a neighbor will dynamically pick the local BGP interface IPv6 address (2001::1/64) as a the next hop for all the updates over IPv4 neighbor configured under IPv6 address family. If the auto-local-address is not configured, the IPv4 mapped IPv6 address (10.1.1.1) as a next hop. Following is the show running-config command output for the above configuration.
BGP Regular Expression Optimization Dell EMC Networking OS optimizes processing time when using regular expressions by caching and re-using regular expression evaluated results, at the expense of some memory in RP1 processor. BGP policies that contain regular expressions to match against as-paths and communities might take a lot of CPU processing time, thus affect BGP routing convergence.
To disable a specific debug command, use the keyword no then the debug command. For example, to disable debugging of BGP updates, use no debug ip bgp updates command. To disable all BGP debugging, use the no debug ip bgp command. To disable all debugging, use the undebug all command. Storing Last and Bad PDUs Dell EMC Networking OS stores the last notification sent/received and the last bad protocol data unit (PDU) received on a per peer basis.
PDU Counters Dell EMC Networking OS supports additional counters for various types of PDUs sent and received from neighbors. These are seen in the output of the show ip bgp neighbor command.
9 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell EMC Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies. CAM Allocation CAM Allocation for Ingress To allocate the space for regions such has L2 ingress ACL, IPV4 ingress ACL, IPV6 ingress ACL, IPV4 QoS, L2 QoS, PBR, VRF ACL, and so forth, use the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode.
NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 1024 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 1024 entries. Select 2 to configure 2048 entries.
NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3 Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4 Reload the system. EXEC Privilege mode reload Test CAM Usage To determine whether sufficient CAM space is available to enable a service-policy, use the test-cam-usage command.
Example of show running-config cam-profile Command Dell#show running-config cam-profile ! cam-profile default microcode default Dell# View CAM-ACL Settings The show cam-acl command shows the cam-acl setting that will be loaded after the next reload.
L2Acl Ipv4Acl Ipv6Acl Ipv4Qos L2Qos L2PT IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6 4 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 -- Stack unit 7 -Current Settings(in bloc
Starting from OS 9.11(2.0), ACL filters are optimized to support more than 200 egress ACL rules on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON.
• Assign the silence period for syslog warning. CONFIGURATION mode cam-threshold threshold {default | threshold-percent} silence-period {default | silenceperiod-value} The range of silence period is from 0 to 65535. The default is 0 seconds. NOTE: If you delete a FP in a CAM region that is assigned with threshold, a syslog warning appears even during the silence period.
QoS CAM Region Limitation To store QoS service policies, the default CAM profile allocates a partition within the IPv4Flow region. If the QoS CAM space is exceeded, a message similar to the following displays.
Table 14. UFT Modes — Table Size UFT Mode L2 MAC Table Size L3 Host Table Size L3 LPM Table Size Default 160K 144K 16K Scaled-l3-hosts 96K 208K 16K Scaled-l3-routes 32K 16K 128K Configuring UFT Modes To configure the Unified Forwarding Table (UFT) modes, follow these steps. 1 Select a mode to initialize the maximum scalability size for L2 MAC table or L3 Host table or L3 Route table.
10 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 28. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 4200 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS). The basics for creating a CoPP service policy are to create a Layer 2, Layer 3, and/or an IPv6 ACL rule for the desired protocol type. Then, create a QoS input policy to rate-limit the protocol traffics according to the ACL.
CONTROL-PLANE mode service-policy rate-limit-protocols Examples of Configuring CoPP for Different Protocols The following example shows creating the IP/IPv6/MAC extended ACL.
DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#class-map class_lacp qos-policy rate_limit_200k DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#class-map class-ipv6 qos-policy rate_limit_200k DellEMC(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the control plane service policy.
The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)#control-plane DellEMC(conf-control-plane)#service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues cpuq_rate_policy Displaying CoPP Configuration The CLI provides show commands to display the protocol traffic assigned to each control-plane queue and the current rate-limit applied to each queue. Other show commands display statistical information for trouble shooting CoPP operation.
STP ISIS 01:80:c2:00:00:00 any 01:80:c2:00:00:14/15 any 09:00:2b:00:00:04/05 any Q7 Q7 Q7 CP CP CP _ _ DellEMC# To view the queue mapping for IPv6 protocols, use the show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping command.
11 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks.
DCB refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. Through network consolidation, DCB results in reduced operational cost, simplified management, and easy scalability by avoiding the need to deploy separate application-specific networks.
Figure 29. Illustration of Traffic Congestion The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: • FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. • iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell EMC Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: • PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface.
The following figure shows how ETS allows you to allocate bandwidth when different traffic types are classed according to 802.1p priority and mapped to priority groups. Figure 30. Enhanced Transmission Selection The following table lists the traffic groupings ETS uses to select multiprotocol traffic for transmission. Table 15. ETS Traffic Groupings Traffic Groupings Description Group ID A 4-bit identifier assigned to each priority group. The range is from 0 to 7 configurable; 8 - 14 reservation and 15.
PFC parameters PFC Configuration TLV and Application Priority Configuration TLV. ETS parameters ETS Configuration TLV and ETS Recommendation TLV. Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow The following figure shows how DCB handles a traffic flow on an interface. Figure 31. DCB PFC and ETS Traffic Handling Enabling Data Center Bridging DCB is automatically configured when you configure FCoE or iSCSI optimization. Data center bridging supports converged enhanced Ethernet (CEE) in a data center network.
dcb enable 2 Set PFC buffering on the DCB stack unit. CONFIGURATION mode DellEMC(conf)#dcb enable pfc-queues NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: DCB is not supported if you enable link-level flow control on one or more interfaces. For more information, refer to Ethernet Pause Frames. DCB Maps and its Attributes This topic contains the following sections that describe how to configure a DCB map, apply the configured DCB map to a port, configure PFC without a DCB map, and configure lossless queues.
Data Center Bridging: Default Configuration Before you configure PFC and ETS on a switch see the priority group setting taken into account the following default settings: DCB is enabled. PFC and ETS are globally enabled by default. The default dot1p priority-queue assignments are applied as follows: DellEMC(conf)#do show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue : 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 3 DellEMC(conf)# PFC is not applied on specific dot1p priorities.
priority-pgid dot1p0_group_num dot1p1_group_num ...dot1p7_group_num Priority group range is from 0 to 7. All priorities that map to the same queue must be in the same priority group. Leave a space between each priority group number. For example: priority-pgid 0 0 0 1 2 4 4 4 in which priority group 0 maps to dot1p priorities 0, 1, and 2; priority group 1 maps to dot1p priority 3; priority group 2 maps to dot1p priority 4; priority group 4 maps to dot1p priorities 5, 6, and 7.
For the dot1p-queue assignments, refer to the dot1p Priority-Queue Assignment table. The maximum number of lossless queues globally supported on the switch is two. The range is from 0 to 7. Separate the queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, pfc no-drop queues 1,7 or pfc no-drop queues 2-7. The default: No lossless queues are configured. 3 Configure to drop the unknown unicast packets flooding on lossless priorities.
When traffic congestion occurs, PFC sends a pause frame to a peer device with the CoS priority values of the traffic that needs to be stopped. DCBx provides the link-level exchange of PFC parameters between peer devices. PFC allows network administrators to create zero-loss links for SAN traffic that requires no-drop service, while at the same time retaining packet-drop congestion management for LAN traffic. On a switch, PFC is enabled by default on Ethernet ports (pfc mode on command).
The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure PFC in a DCB map: • You can enable PFC on a maximum of four priority queues on an interface. The default is two. Enabling PFC for dot1p priorities configures the corresponding port queue as lossless. • You cannot enable PFC and link-level flow control at the same time on an interface.
Configuring Lossless Queues DCB also supports the manual configuration of lossless queues on an interface when PFC mode is disabled in a DCB map, apply the map on the interface. The configuration of no-drop queues provides flexibility for ports on which PFC is not needed, but lossless traffic should egress from the interface. Configuring no-drop queues is applicable only on the interfaces which do not need PFC.
Step Task Command Command Mode 5 Apply the DCB map, created to disable the PFC operation, on the interface dcb-map {name | default} INTERFACE 6 Configure the port queues that still function as no-drop queues for lossless traffic. For the dot1p-queue assignments. pfc no-drop queuesqueue-range INTERFACE The maximum number of lossless queues globally supported on a port is 2.
Although the system contains of space for shared buffers, a minimum guaranteed buffer is provided to all the internal and external ports in the system for both unicast and multicast traffic. This minimum guaranteed buffer reduces the total available shared buffer to . This shared buffer can be used for lossy and lossless traffic. The default behavior causes up to a maximum of 6.6 MB to be used for PFC-related traffic. The remaining approximate space of 1 MB can be used by lossy traffic.
2 Associate above class-maps to Queues Queue assignment as below. Table 19. Queue Assignments Internal-priority Queue 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 3 Dot1p->Queue Mapping Configuration is retained at the default value. 4 Interface Configurations on server connected ports. a Enable DCB globally. DellEMC(conf)#dcb enable b Apply PFC Priority configuration. Configure priorities on which PFC is enabled.
dellNetFpStatsPerP gTable This table fetches the Allocated Min cells, Shared cells, and Headroom cells per Priority Group, the mode in which the buffer cells are allocated — Static or Dynamic and the Used Min Cells, Shared cells and Headroom cells per Priority Group. The table fetches a value of 0 if the mode of allocation is Static and a value of 1 if the mode of allocation is Dynamic. This table lists thestack-unit number, port number and priority group number.
Default dot1p to queue configuration is as follows: Table 21. Dot1p to Queue Mapping Packet-Dot1p Queue 0 2 1 0 2 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 PFC and ETS Configuration Examples This section contains examples of how to configure and apply DCB policies on an interface.
Generation of PFC for a Priority for Untagged Packets In order to generate PFC for a particular priority for untagged packets, and configuring PFC for that priority, you should find the queue number associated with priority from TABLE 1 and Associate a DCB map to forward the matched DSCP packet to that queue. PFC frames gets generated with PFC priority associated with the queue when the queue gets congested.
PRIORITY-GROUP mode priority-list value The range is from 0 to 7. The default is none. Separate priority values with a comma. Specify a priority range with a dash. For example, priority-list 3,5-7. 4 Exit priority-group configuration mode. PRIORITY-GROUP mode exit 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to configure all remaining dot1p priorities in an ETS priority group. 6 Specify the dot1p priority-to-priority group mapping for each priority. priority-pgid dot1p0_group_num dot1p1_group_num ...
– The CIN version supports two types of strict-priority scheduling: ◦ Group strict priority: Use this to increase its bandwidth usage to the bandwidth total of the priority group and allow a single priority flow in a priority group. A single flow in a group can use all the bandwidth allocated to the group. ◦ Link strict priority: Use this to increase to the maximum link bandwidth and allow a flow in any priority group. NOTE: CIN supports only the dot1p priority-queue assignment in a priority group.
Configuring ETS in a DCB Map A switch supports the use of a DCB map in which you configure enhanced transmission selection (ETS) setting. To configure ETS parameters, you must apply a DCB map on an interface. ETS Configuration Notes ETS provides a way to optimize bandwidth allocation to outbound 802.1p classes of converged Ethernet traffic. Different traffic types have different service needs. Using ETS, you can create groups within an 802.
• Although ETS bandwidth allocation or strict-priority queuing does not support weighted random early detection (WRED), explicit congestion notification (ECN), rate shaping, and rate limiting because these parameters are not negotiated by DCBx with peer devices, you can apply a QoS output policy with WRED and/or rate shaping on a DCBx CIN-enabled interface.
Applying DCB Policies in a Switch Stack You can apply DCB policies with PFC and ETS configurations to all stacked ports in a switch stack or on a stacked switch. To apply DCB policies in a switch stack, follow this step. • Apply the specified DCB policy on all ports of the switch stack or a single stacked switch.
with the new parameter values. When an auto-upstream port (besides the configuration source) receives and overwrites its configuration with internally propagated information, one of the following actions is taken: • If the peer configuration received is compatible with the internally propagated port configuration, the link with the DCBx peer is enabled.
NOTE: On a DCBx port, application priority TLV advertisements are handled as follows: • The application priority TLV is transmitted only if the priorities in the advertisement match the configured PFC priorities on the port. • On auto-upstream and auto-downstream ports: – If a configuration source is elected, the ports send an application priority TLV based on the application priority TLV received on the configuration-source port.
Propagation of DCB Information When an auto-upstream or auto-downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer, the port acts as a DCBx client and checks if a DCBx configuration source exists on the switch. • If a configuration source is found, the received configuration is checked against the currently configured values that are internally propagated by the configuration source.
Figure 32. DCBx Sample Topology DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: • For DCBx, on a port interface, enable LLDP in both Send (TX) and Receive (RX) mode (the protocol lldp mode command; refer to the example in CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) chapter). If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.5} • cee: configures the port to use CEE (Intel 1.01). • cin: configures the port to use Cisco-Intel-Nuova (DCBx 1.0). • ieee-v2.5: configures the port to use IEEE 802.1Qaz (Draft 2.5). The default is Auto. 4 Configure the DCBx port role the interface uses to exchange DCB information.
Configuring DCBx Globally on the Switch To globally configure the DCBx operation on a switch, follow these steps. 1 Enter Global Configuration mode. EXEC PRIVILEGE mode configure 2 Enter LLDP Configuration mode to enable DCBx operation. CONFIGURATION mode [no] protocol lldp 3 Configure the DCBx version used on all interfaces not already configured to exchange DCB information. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.
6 Configure the FCoE priority advertised for the FCoE protocol in Application Priority TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] fcoe priority-bits priority-bitmap The priority-bitmap range is from 1 to FF. The default is 0x8. 7 Configure the iSCSI priority advertised for the iSCSI protocol in Application Priority TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] iscsi priority-bits priority-bitmap The priority-bitmap range is from 1 to FF. The default is 0x10.
Verifying the DCB Configuration To display DCB configurations, use the following show commands. Table 22. Displaying DCB Configurations Command Output show qos dot1p-queue mapping Displays the current 802.1p priority-queue mapping. show dcb [stack-unit unit-number] Displays the data center bridging status, number of PFC-enabled ports, and number of PFC-enabled queues. On the master switch in a stack, you can specify a stack-unit number. The range is from 0 to 5.
priority-list 4 set-pgid 2 The following example shows the output of the show qos dcb-map test command. DellEMC#show qos dcb-map test ----------------------State :Complete PfcMode:ON -------------------PG:0 TSA:ETS BW:50 PFC:OFF Priorities:0 1 2 5 6 7 PG:1 TSA:ETS BW:50 Priorities:3 4 PFC:ON The following example shows the show interfaces pfc summary command.
Table 23. show interface pfc summary Command Description Fields Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number. Admin mode is on; Admin is enabled PFC Admin mode is on or off with a list of the configured PFC priorities . When PFC admin mode is on, PFC advertisements are enabled to be sent and received from peers; received PFC configuration takes effect. The admin operational status for a DCBx exchange of PFC configuration is enabled or disabled.
Fields Description PFC TLV Statistics: Input TLV pkts Number of PFC TLVs received. PFC TLV Statistics: Output TLV pkts Number of PFC TLVs transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Error pkts Number of PFC error packets received. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Tx pkts Number of PFC pause frames transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Rx pkts Number of PFC pause frames received The following example shows the show interface pfc statistics command.
7 - - - - - Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled The following example shows the show interface ets detail command.
0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Pkts The following table describes the show interface ets detail command fields. Table 24. show interface ets detail Command Description Field Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number. Maximum Supported TC Group Maximum number of priority groups supported. Number of Traffic Classes Number of 802.1p priorities currently configured. Admin mode ETS mode: on or off.
Link Delay 45556 pause quantum 0 Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts stack unit 2 stack-port all Admin mode is On Admin is enabled, Priority list is 4-5 Local is enabled, Priority list is 4-5 Link Delay 45556 pause quantum 0 Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts The following example shows the show stack-unit all stack-ports all ets details command.
Local DCBx Configured mode is IEEEv2.5 Peer Operating version is IEEEv2.5 Local DCBx TLVs Transmitted: ERPFi 1 Input PFC TLV pkts, 2 Output PFC TLV pkts, 0 Error PFC pkts 0 PFC Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts 1 Input ETS Conf TLV Pkts, 1 Output ETS Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error ETS Conf TLV Pkts 1 Input ETS Reco TLV pkts, 1 Output ETS Reco TLV pkts, 0 Error ETS Reco TLV Pkts The following example shows the show interface DCBx detail command (legacy CEE).
Field Description Local DCBx Compatibility mode DCBx version accepted in a DCB configuration as compatible. In auto-upstream mode, a port can only received a DCBx version supported on the remote peer. Local DCBx Configured mode DCBx version configured on the port: CEE, CIN, IEEE v2.5, or Auto (port auto-configures to use the DCBx version received from a peer). Peer Operating version DCBx version that the peer uses to exchange DCB parameters.
NOTE: Dell EMC Networking does not recommend mapping all ingress traffic to a single queue when using PFC and ETS. However, Dell EMC Networking does recommend using Ingress traffic classification using the service-class dynamic dot1p command (honor dot1p) on all DCB-enabled interfaces.
CONFIGURATION mode dcb pfc-total-buffer-size buffer-size stack-unit all port-set {port-pipe |all} Port-set number range is from 0 to 3. Sample DCB Configuration The following shows examples of using PFC and ETS to manage your data center traffic. In the following example: • Incoming SAN traffic is configured for priority-based flow control. • Outbound LAN, IPC, and SAN traffic is mapped into three ETS priority groups and configured for enhanced traffic selection (bandwidth allocation and scheduling).
QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
12 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
Figure 34. DHCP packet Format The following table lists common DHCP options. Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
Option Number and Description Rebinding Time Option 59 Specifies the amount of time after the IP address is granted that the client attempts to renew its lease with any server, if the original server does not respond. Vendor Class Identifer Option 60 L2 DHCP Snooping Option 82 Identifies a user-defined string used by the Relay Agent to forward DHCP client packets to a specific server.
Figure 35. Client and Server Messaging Implementation Information The following describes DHCP implementation. • Dell EMC Networking implements DHCP based on RFC 2131 and RFC 3046. • IP source address validation is a sub-feature of DHCP Snooping; the Dell EMC Networking OS uses access control lists (ACLs) internally to implement this feature and as such, you cannot apply ACLs to an interface which has IP source address validation.
DHCP Server Responsibilities Description keeping track of which addresses have been allocated and which are still available. Configuration Parameter Storage and Management DHCP servers also store and maintain other parameters that are sent to clients when requested. These parameters specify in detail how a client is to operate. Lease Management DHCP servers use leases to allocate addresses to clients for a limited time.
Configuration Tasks To configure DHCP, an administrator must first set up a DHCP server and provide it with configuration parameters and policy information including IP address ranges, lease length specifications, and configuration data that DHCP hosts need.
Configure a Method of Hostname Resolution Dell systems are capable of providing DHCP clients with parameters for two methods of hostname resolution—using DNS or NetBIOS WINS. Using DNS for Address Resolution A domain is a group of networks. DHCP clients query DNS IP servers when they need to correlate host names to IP addresses. 1 Create a domain. DHCP domain-name name 2 Specify in order of preference the DNS servers that are available to a DHCP client.
DHCP host—address address 3 Specify the client hardware address. DHCP hardware-address hardware-address type • hardware-address: the client MAC address. • type: the protocol of the hardware platform. The default protocol is Ethernet. Debugging the DHCP Server To debug the DHCP server, use the following command. • Display debug information for DHCP server.
in Layer 3 mode and pre-configured with no shutdown and no ip address. For this reason, you cannot enter configuration commands to set up the switch. To interrupt a BMP process, prevent a loop from occurring, and apply the Dell EMC Networking OS image and startup configuration stored in the local flash, enter the stop bmp command from the console.
ip address dhcp Dynamically assigned IP addresses can be released without removing the DHCP client operation on the interface on a switch configured as a DHCP client. 3 Manually acquire a new IP address from the DHCP server by releasing a dynamically acquired IP address while retaining the DHCP client configuration on the interface. EXEC Privilege mode release dhcp interface type slot/port[/subport] 4 Acquire a new IP address with renewed lease time from a DHCP server.
DHCP Client Operation with Other Features The DHCP client operates with other Dell EMC Networking OS features, as the following describes. Stacking The DHCP client daemon runs only on the master unit and handles all DHCP packet transactions. It periodically synchronizes the lease file with the standby unit. When a stack failover occurs, the new master requires the same DHCP server-assigned IP address on DHCP client interfaces.
DHCP Relay When DHCP Server and Client are in Different VRFs When the DHCP server and DHCP clients belong to different VRFs on the relay agent, you can configure the system to leak routes across VRFs. You can configure the system to leak the following routes across VRFs: • Connected routes • The complete routing table • Selective routes The following illustration depicts the topology in which routes are leaked between VRFs in the relay agent.
ip route-import 1:1 map1 ip route-export 2:2 map2 ! ip vrf VRF_2 ip route-import 2:2 ip route-export 1:1 ! ! route-map map1 permit 10 match ip address ip1 ! route-map map2 permit 20 match ip address ip2 ! ip prefix-list ip1 seq 5 permit 20.0.0.0/24 <----- This is needed for data forwarding seq 10 permit 20.0.0.2/32 <---- This is specific to internal operation of DHCP relay ! ip prefix-list ip2 seq 5 permit 10.0.0.
Example configuration of global DHCP relay source IPv4 or IPv6 interface Following is the sample configuration to configure loopback interface with IPv4 and IPv6 address in CONFIGURATION MODE. Dell(conf)# interface loopback 1 Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# ip vrf forwarding vrf1 Dell(conf-if-lo-1)# ip address 1.1.1.
IPv6 configuration, and two different loopback interfaces (loopback 2 and 3). DHCP relay forwards packets using the loopback 2 interface with IPv4 and IPv6 addresses ((2.2.2.2/32 and 2::2/128) from Vlan 2. The same way, the relay uses IPv4 and IPv6 addresses (3.3.3.3/32 and 3::3/128) of loopback 3 interface from Vlan 3. Dell(conf)# interface Vlan 2 Dell(conf-if-vl-2)# ip vrf forwarding vrf1 Dell(conf-if-vl-2)# ip address 2.0.0.
Option 82 RFC 3046 (the relay agent information option, or Option 82) is used for class-based IP address assignment. The code for the relay agent information option is 82, and is comprised of two sub-options, circuit ID and remote ID. Circuit ID This is the interface on which the client-originated message is received. Remote ID This identifies the host from which the message is received. The value of this sub-option is the MAC address of the relay agent that adds Option 82.
DHCPv6 relay agent options By default, the DHCPv6 relay agent inserts Options 18 and 37 before forwarding DHCPv6 packets to the server. Interface ID (Option 18) This is the interface on which the client-originated message is received. Default format: The default format of this option is VLAN ID:LAG ID:slot ID:port ID. Remote ID (Option 37) This identifies the host from which the message is received.
NOTE: If you enable DHCP Option 82 using the ip dhcp relay command, by default, the remote-ID field contains the MAC address of the relay agent. If you configure the remote ID as the host name in a VLT setup, configure different host names on both VLT peers. If you configure the remote ID with your own string, ensure that your strings are different on both VLT peers. DHCP Snooping in a VLT Setup In a VLT setup, the DHCP snooping binding table synchronizes between the VLT nodes.
EXEC Privilege mode ip dhcp snooping binding mac mac-address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface interfacetype interface-number lease lease-value If multiple IP addresses are expected for the same MAC address, repeat this step for all IP addresses. Adding a Static IPV6 DHCP Snooping Binding Table To add a static entry in the snooping database, use the following command. • Add a static entry in the snooping binding table.
IP IP IP IP DHCP DHCP DHCP DHCP Snooping Snooping Mac Verification Relay Information-option Relay Trust Downstream : : : : Enabled. Disabled. Disabled. Disabled.
The following example shows a sample output of the show ip dhcp snooping binding command for a device connected to the peer VLT node, but not to itself. The Po 10 interface is the VLTi link between the VLT peers. DellEMC#show ip dhcp snooping binding Codes : S - Static D - Dynamic IP Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ========================================================================= 10.1.1.10 00:00:a0:00:00:00 39735 S Vl 200 Po 10 10.1.1.
To view the number of entries in the table, use the show ip dhcp snooping binding command. This output displays the snooping binding table created using the ACK packets from the trusted port. DellEMC#show ip dhcp snooping binding Codes : S - Static D - Dynamic IP Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ================================================================ 10.1.1.251 00:00:4d:57:f2:50 172800 D Vl 10 Te 1/2/1 10.1.1.252 00:00:4d:57:e6:f6 172800 D Vl 10 Te 1/1/1 10.1.1.
arp inspection Examples of Viewing the ARP Information To view entries in the ARP database, use the show arp inspection database command. DellEMC#show arp inspection database Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU --------------------------------------------------------------------Internet 10.1.1.251 00:00:4d:57:f2:50 Te 1/2/1 Vl 10 CP Internet 10.1.1.252 00:00:4d:57:e6:f6 Te 1/1/1 Vl 10 CP Internet 10.1.1.253 00:00:4d:57:f8:e8 Te 1/3/1 Vl 10 CP Internet 10.1.1.
Bypassing the ARP Inspection You can configure a port to skip ARP inspection by defining the interface as trusted, which is useful in multi-switch environments. ARPs received on trusted ports bypass validation against the binding table. All ports are untrusted by default. To bypass the ARP inspection, use the following command. • Specify an interface as trusted so that ARPs are not validated against the binding table.
• Enable IP source address validation with VLAN option. INTERFACE mode ip dhcp source-address-validation vlan vlan-id NOTE: Before enabling SAV With VLAN option, allocate at least one FP block to the ipmacacl CAM region. DHCP MAC Source Address Validation DHCP MAC source address validation (SAV) validates a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload.
To display the IP+MAC ACL for an interface for the entire system, use the show ip dhcp snooping source-addressvalidation [interface] command in EXEC Privilege mode. Viewing the Number of SAV Dropped Packets The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters command displays the number of SAV dropped packets.
13 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Configuring the Hash Algorithm TeraScale has one algorithm that is used for link aggregation groups (LAGs), ECMP, and NH-ECMP, and ExaScale can use three different algorithms for each of these features. To adjust the ExaScale behavior to match TeraScale, use the following command.
Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
Interface Te 1/1/1 Te 1/1/1 Line Protocol Up Up Utilization[In Percent] 36 52 Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold. When you do not configure the maximum number of routes, the CAM can hold a maximum ECMP per route. To configure the maximum number of paths, use the following command. NOTE: For the new settings to take effect, save the new ECMP settings to the startup-config (write-mem) then reload the system.
• Modify the threshold for monitoring ECMP group bundles. CONFIGURATION mode link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold {percent} The range is from 1 to 90%. • The default is 60%. Display details for an ECMP group bundle. EXEC mode show link-bundle-distribution ecmp-group ecmp-group-id The range is from 1 to 64. Viewing an ECMP Group NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network.
Support for ECMP in host table ECMP support in the L3 host table is available on the system. IPv6 /128 prefix route entries and IPv4 /32 prefix entries which are moved to host table can have ECMP. For other platforms, only the IPv6 /128 prefix route entries is stored in the L3 host table without ECMP support. The software supports a command to program IPv6 /128 route prefixes in the host table. The output of show IPv6 cam command has been enhanced to include the ECMP field in the Neighbor table of Ipv6 CAM.
14 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
FIP provides functionality for discovering and logging into an FCF. After discovering and logging in, FIP allows FCoE traffic to be sent and received between FCoE end-devices (ENodes) and the FCF. FIP uses its own EtherType and frame format. The following illustration shows the communication that occurs between an ENode server and an FCoE switch (FCF). The following table lists the FIP functions. Table 29.
FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges In a converged Ethernet network, intermediate Ethernet bridges can snoop on FIP packets during the login process on an FCF. Then, using ACLs, a transit bridge can permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF. An Ethernet bridge that provides these functions is called a FIP snooping bridge (FSB). On a FIP snooping bridge, ACLs are created dynamically as FIP login frames are processed.
Figure 37. FIP Snooping on a Dell EMC Networking Switch The following sections describe how to configure the FIP snooping feature on a switch: • Allocate CAM resources for FCoE. • Perform FIP snooping (allowing and parsing FIP frames) globally on all VLANs or on a per-VLAN basis. • To assign a MAC address to an FCoE end-device (server ENode or storage device) after a server successfully logs in, set the FCoE MAC address prefix (FC-MAP) value an FCF uses.
FIP Snooping in a Switch Stack FIP snooping supports switch stacking as follows: • A switch stack configuration is synchronized with the standby stack unit. • Dynamic population of the FCoE database (ENode, Session, and FCF tables) is synchronized with the standby stack unit. The FCoE database is maintained by snooping FIP keep-alive messages. • In case of a failover, the new master switch starts the required timers for the FCoE database tables. Timers run only on the master stack unit.
• You can configure multiple FCF-trusted interfaces in a VLAN. • When you disable FIP snooping: – ACLs are not installed, FIP and FCoE traffic is not blocked, and FIP packets are not processed. – The existing per-VLAN and FIP snooping configuration is stored. The configuration is re-applied the next time you enable the FIP snooping feature. • You must apply the CAM-ACL space for the FCoE region before enabling the FIP-Snooping feature.
Enable FIP Snooping on VLANs You can enable FIP snooping globally on a switch on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. When you enable FIP snooping on VLANs: • FIP frames are allowed to pass through the switch on the enabled VLANs and are processed to generate FIP snooping ACLs. • FCoE traffic is allowed on VLANs only after a successful virtual-link initialization (fabric login FLOGI) between an ENode and an FCF. All other FCoE traffic is dropped.
Table 30. Impact of Enabling FIP Snooping Impact Description MAC address learning MAC address learning is not performed on FIP and FCoE frames, which are denied by ACLs dynamically created by FIP snooping on server-facing ports in ENode mode. MTU auto-configuration MTU size is set to mini-jumbo (2500 bytes) when a port is in Switchport mode, the FIP snooping feature is enabled on the switch, and FIP snooping is enabled on all or individual VLANs.
4 Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch. CONFIGURATION mode. feature fip-snooping 5 Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode or VLAN INTERFACE mode. fip-snooping enable 6 Configure the port for bridge-to-FCF links. INTERFACE mode or CONFIGURATION mode fip-snooping port-mode fcf NOTE: To disable the FCoE transit feature or FIP snooping on VLANs, use the no version of a command; for example, no feature fip-snooping or no fip-snooping enable.
Examples of the show fip-snooping Commands The following example shows the show fip-snooping sessions command.
Table 33. show fip-snooping enode Command Description Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode. ENode Interface Slot/port number of the interface connected to the ENode. FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF. The following example shows the show fip-snooping fcf command. DellEMC# show fip-snooping fcf FCF MAC FCF Interface VLAN FC-MAP FKA_ADV_PERIOD No.
Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC# show fip-snooping statistics int tengigabitethernet 1/11/1 Number of Vlan Requests :1 Number of Vlan Notifications :0 Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits :1 Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits :0 Number of FLOGI :1 Number of FDISC :16 Number of FLOGO :0 Number of Enode Keep Alive :4416 Number of VN Port Keep Alive :3136 Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement :0 Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement :0 Number of FLOGI A
Field Description Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Number of FIP-snooped FLOGI request frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Number of FIP-snooped FDISC request frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGO Number of FIP-snooped FLOGO frames received on the interface. Number of ENode Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped ENode keep-alive frames received on the interface.
FCoE Transit Configuration Example The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 38. Configuration Example: FIP Snooping on a Switch In this example, DCBx and PFC are enabled on the FIP snooping bridge and on the FCF ToR switch.
Example of Configuring the ENode Server-Facing Port DellEMC(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# portmode hybrid DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# switchport DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# protocol lldp DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-lldp)# dcbx port-role auto-downstream NOTE: A port is enabled by default for bridge-ENode links.
15 Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up This chapter describes the Flex Hash and fast-boot enhancements. Topics: • Flex Hash Capability Overview • Configuring the Flex Hash Mechanism • Configuring Fast Boot and LACP Fast Switchover • Optimizing the Boot Time • Interoperation of Applications with Fast Boot and System States • RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview • Preserving 802.
When load balancing RRoCE packets using flex hash is enabled, the show ip flow command is disabled. Similarly, when the show ip flow command is in use (ingress port-based load balancing is disabled), the hashing of RRoCE packets is disabled. Flex hash APIs do not mask out unwanted byte values after extraction of the data from the Layer 4 headers for the offset value.
adjacency settings) is learned and installed before the traffic resumes. In a typical network scenario, a traffic disconnection of 150 seconds or more usually occurs. When you employ the optimized booting functionality, the traffic outage duration is reduced drastically.
ports to be 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces and 8 ports as 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. You must configure the switch to operate with an uplink speed of 40 Gigabit Ethernet per second. Interoperation of Applications with Fast Boot and System States This functionality is supported on the platform.
BGP Graceful Restart When the system contains one or more BGP peerings configured for BGP graceful restart, fast boot performs the following actions: • A closure of the TCP sessions is performed on all sockets corresponding to BGP sessions on which Graceful Restart has been negotiated. This behavior is to force the peer to perform the helper role so that any routes advertised by the restarting system are retained and the peering session will not go down due to BGP Hold timeout.
Changes to BGP Multipath When the system becomes active after a fast-boot restart, a change has been made to the BGP multipath and ECMP behavior. The system delays the computation and installation of additional paths to a destination into the BGP routing information base (RIB) and forwarding table for a certain period of time.
enabled, the packets comprise TCP and UDP packets and they can be marked with DSCP code points. Multicast is not supported in that network. RRoCE packets are received and transmitted on specific interfaces called lite-subinterfaces. These interfaces are similar to the normal Layer 3 physical interfaces except for the extra provisioning that they offer to enable the VLAN ID for encapsulation. You can configure a physical interface or a Layer 3 Port Channel interface as a lite subinterface.
16 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring. If the ring is complete, the frame is received on its secondary port and the Master node resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation.
In the following example, FRRP 101 is a ring with its own Control VLAN, and FRRP 202 has its own Control VLAN running on another ring. A Member VLAN that spans both rings is added as a Member VLAN to both FRRP groups. Switch R3 has two instances of FRRP running on it: one for each ring. The example topology that follows shows R3 assuming the role of a Transit node for both FRRP 101 and FRRP 202. Figure 39.
• STP disabled on ring interfaces. • Master node secondary port is in blocking state during Normal operation. • Ring health frames (RHF) – Hello RHF: sent at 500ms (hello interval); Only the Master node transmits and processes these. – Topology Change RHF: triggered updates; processed at all nodes. Important FRRP Concepts The following table lists some important FRRP concepts.
Concept Explanation number, on any topology change to ensure that all Transit nodes receive it. There is no periodic transmission of TCRHFs. The TCRHFs are sent on triggered events of ring failure or ring restoration only. Implementing FRRP • FRRP is media and speed independent. • FRRP is a Dell proprietary protocol that does not interoperate with any other vendor. • You must disable the spanning tree protocol (STP) on both the Primary and Secondary interfaces before you can enable FRRP.
Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • You can only add ring nodes to the VLAN. • A control VLAN can belong to one FRRP group only. • Tag control VLAN ports. • All ports on the ring must use the same VLAN ID for the control VLAN. • You cannot configure a VLAN as both a control VLAN and member VLAN on the same ring. • Only two interfaces can be members of a control VLAN (the Master Primary and Secondary ports).
Configuring and Adding the Member VLANs Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as Control or Member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to the Layer 2 chapter. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • Tag control VLAN ports. Member VLAN ports, except the Primary/Secondary interface, can be tagged or untagged.
Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode. timer {hello-interval|dead-interval} milliseconds – Hello-Interval: the range is from 50 to 2000, in increments of 50 (default is 500). – Dead-Interval: the range is from 50 to 6000, in increments of 50 (default is 1500).
show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • • • • • • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only. Spanning Tree (if you enable it globally) must be disabled on both Primary and Secondary interfaces when you enable FRRP.
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/14/1,11/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/14/1,11/1 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary TenGigabitEthernet 1/14/1 secondary TenGigabitEthernet 1/11/1 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/14/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! i
Figure 40. FRRP Ring Connecting VLT Devices You can also configure an FRRP ring where both the VLT peers are connected to the FRRP ring and the VLTi acts as the primary interface for the FRRP Master and transit nodes. This active-active FRRP configuration blocks the FRRP ring on a per VLAN or VLAN group basis enabling the configuration to spawn across different set of VLANs.
In the FRRP ring R2, the primary interface for VLT Node1 (transit node) is the VLTi. P1 is the secondary interface, which is an orphan port that is participating in the FRRP ring topology. V1 is the control VLAN through which the RFHs are exchanged indicating the health of the nodes and the FRRP ring itself. In addition to the control VLAN, multiple member VLANS are configured (for example, M11 through Mn) that carry the data traffic across the FRRP rings.
17 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and deregister attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 42.
Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command. • Enable GVRP for the entire switch. CONFIGURATION mode gvrp enable Example of Configuring GVRP DellEMC(conf)#protocol gvrp DellEMC(config-gvrp)#no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable DellEMC(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command.
Based on the configuration in the following example, the interface is not removed from VLAN 34 or VLAN 35 despite receiving a GVRP Leave message. Additionally, the interface is not dynamically added to VLAN 45 or VLAN 46, even if a GVRP Join message is received.
18 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
IGMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets, as shown in the following illustration. Figure 43. IGMP Messages in IP Packets Join a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. Responding to an IGMP Query The following describes how a host can join a multicast group. 1 One router on a subnet is elected as the querier.
still receives no response, the querier removes the group from the list associated with forwarding port and stops forwarding traffic for that group to the subnet. IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2. However, there are differences. • Version 3 adds the ability to filter by multicast source, which helps multicast routing protocols avoid forwarding traffic to subnets where there are no interested receivers.
Figure 45. IGMP Version 3–Capable Multicast Routers Address Structure Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1 The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2 The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1.
Figure 46. Membership Reports: Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1 Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary.
Figure 47. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1 Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2 Enable a multicast routing protocol.
Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. • View IGMP-enabled IPv4 interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode • show ip igmp interface View IGMP-enabled IPv6 interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 mld interface Example of the show ip igmp interface Command DellEMC#show ip igmp interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10/1 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 165.87.34.
Internet address is 1.1.1.1/24 IGMP is enabled on interface IGMP query interval is 60 seconds IGMP querier timeout is 125 seconds IGMP max query response time is 10 seconds IGMP last member query response interval is 1000 ms IGMP immediate-leave is disabled IGMP activity: 0 joins, 0 leaves, 0 channel joins, 0 channel leaves IGMP querying router is 1.1.1.1 (this system) IGMP version is 3 Viewing IGMP Groups To view both learned and statically configured IGMP groups, use the following command.
When the querier receives a leave message from a host, it sends a group-specific query to the subnet. If no response is received, it sends another. The amount of time that the querier waits to receive a response to the initial query before sending a second one is the last member query interval (LMQI). The switch waits one LMQI after the second query before removing the group from the state table. • Adjust the period between queries.
IGMP Snooping IGMP snooping enables switches to use information in IGMP packets to generate a forwarding table that associates ports with multicast groups so that when they receive multicast frames, they can forward them only to interested receivers. Multicast packets are addressed with multicast MAC addresses, which represent a group of devices, rather than one unique device.
Removing a Group-Port Association To configure or view the remove a group-port association feature, use the following commands. • Configure the switch to remove a group-port association after receiving an IGMP Leave message. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip igmp fast-leave • View the configuration.
Configuring the Switch as Querier To configure the switch as a querier, use the following command. Hosts that do not support unsolicited reporting wait for a general query before sending a membership report. When the multicast source and receivers are in the same VLAN, multicast traffic is not routed and so there is no querier. Configure the switch to be the querier for a VLAN so that hosts send membership reports and the switch can generate a forwarding table by snooping.
Transit traffic (destination IP not configured in the switch) that is received on the front-end port with destination on the management port is dropped and received in the management port with destination on the front-end port is dropped. Switch-destined traffic (destination IP configured in the switch) is: • Received in the front-end port with destination IP equal to management port IP address or management port subnet broadcast address is dropped.
Application Name Port Number Client Server 443 for secure httpd 8008 HTTP server port for confd application 8888 secure HTTP server port for confd application If you configure a source interface is for any EIS management application, EIS might not coexist with that interface and the behavior is undefined in such a case. You can configure the source interface for the following applications: FTP, ICMP (ping and traceroute utilities), NTP, RADIUS, TACACS, Telnet, TFTP, syslog, and SNMP traps.
• For ping and traceroute utilities that are initiated from the switch, if reachability needs to be tested through routes in the management EIS routing table, you must configure ICMP as a management application. • If ping and traceroute are destined to the management port IP address, the response traffic for these packets is sent by doing route lookup in the EIS routing table.
• If the route lookup in the EIS routing table fails or if management port is down, then packets are dropped. The application-specific count of the dropped packets is incremented and is viewed using the show management application pkt-drop-cntr command. This counter is cleared using clear management application pkt-drop-cntr command. • Packets whose destination TCP/UDP port does not match a configured management application, take the regular route lookup flow in the IP stack.
Handling of Transit Traffic (Traffic Separation) This is forwarded traffic where destination IP is not an IP address configured in the switch. • Packets received on the management port with destination on the front-end port is dropped. • Packets received on the front-end port with destination on the management port is dropped. • A separate drop counter is incremented for this case. This counter is viewed using the netstat command, like all other IP layer counters.
This phenomenon occurs where traffic is terminated on the switch. Traffic has not originated from the switch and is not transiting the switch. The switch accepts all traffic destined to the switch, which is received on management or front-end data port. Response traffic with management port IP address as source IP address is handled in the same manner as switch originated traffic. Switch-Originated Traffic This phenomenon occurs where traffic is originating from the switch.
Protocol Behavior when EIS is Enabled Behavior when EIS is Disabled telnet EIS Behavior Default Behavior tftp EIS Behavior Default Behavior icmp (ping and traceroute) EIS Behavior for ICMP Default Behavior Behavior of Various Applications for Switch-Destined Traffic This section describes the different system behaviors that occur when traffic is terminated on the switch. Traffic has not originated from the switch and is not transiting the switch.
• ARP-related processing for switch-destined traffic is done by both master and standby units. VLT VLT feature is for the front-end port only. Because this feature is specific to the management port, this feature can coexist with VLT and nothing specific needs to be done in this feature to handle VLT scenario. DHCP • If DHCP Client is enabled on the management port, a management default route is installed to the switch.
19 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet and 40 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell 40G optics are set to error-disabled state.
• VLAN Interfaces • Loopback Interfaces • Null Interfaces • Port Channel Interfaces • Bulk Configuration • Defining Interface Range Macros • Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces • Non Dell-Qualified Transceivers • Splitting 40G Ports without Reload • Splitting QSFP Ports to SFP+ Ports • Converting a QSFP or QSFP+ Port to an SFP or SFP+ Port • Link Dampening • Link Bundle Monitoring • Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control • Configure the MTU Size on an Interface • Port-
This command has options to display the interface status, IP and MAC addresses, and multiple counters for the amount and type of traffic passing through the interface. If you configured a port channel interface, this command lists the interfaces configured in the port channel. NOTE: To end output from the system, such as the output from the show interfaces command, enter CTRL+C and Dell EMC Networking OS returns to the command prompt.
To determine which physical interfaces are available, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode. This command displays all physical interfaces available on the system. DellEMC#show running Current Configuration ...
Enabling a Physical Interface After determining the type of physical interfaces available, to enable and configure the interfaces, enter INTERFACE mode by using the interface interface command. 1 Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port[/subport] information. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface 2 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
User viewable Logs: Logs for optic insertion and removal are same as QSFP optics. You can use the show inventory media command to check the optic type and the show interface transceiver command to view the optic properties.
Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode Do not configure switching or Layer 2 protocols such as spanning tree protocol (STP) on an interface unless the interface has been set to Layer 2 mode. To set Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface, use the following command. • Enable Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface.
Example of Error Due to Issuing a Layer 3 Command on a Layer 2 Interface If an interface is in the incorrect layer mode for a given command, an error message is displayed (shown in bold). In the following example, the ip address command triggered an error message because the interface is in Layer 2 mode and the ip address command is a Layer 3 command only. DellEMC(conf-if)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if)#ip address 10.10.1.
Automatic recovery of an Err-disabled interface The Dell EMC Networking OS attempts to recover the interface from the Err-disabled state automatically based on the cause of the error.
Whenever the Err-disable recovery timer is reconfigured, it will get effective only after the current timer expires. Following message is displayed after each Err-disable recovery timer configuration: DellEMC(conf)# errdisable recovery interval 30 New timer interval will be effective from the next timer instance only. Example configuration for the recovery cause and the timer interval Following is the sample steps to configure the recovery cause and the timer interval for automatic recovery of an interface.
Management Interfaces The system supports the Management Ethernet interface as well as the standard interface on any port. You can use either method to connect to the system. Configuring Management Interfaces The dedicated Management interface provides management access to the system. You can configure this interface using the CLI, but the configuration options on this interface are limited.
Hardware is DellForce10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:a0:bf:f3 Current address is 00:01:e8:a0:bf:f3 Pluggable media not present Interface index is 302006472 Internet address is 10.16.130.
no shutdown • The interface is the management interface. INTEFACE mode description Example of the show interface and show ip route Commands To display the configuration for a given port, use the show interface command in EXEC Privilege mode, as shown in the following example. To display the routing table, use the show ip route command in EXEC Privilege mode.
– ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24). – secondary: the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. Example of a Configuration for a VLAN Participating in an OSPF Process interface Vlan 10 ip address 1.1.1.
• Port Channel Definition and Standards • Port Channel Benefits • Port Channel Implementation • Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces Port Channel Definition and Standards Link aggregation is defined by IEEE 802.3ad as a method of grouping multiple physical interfaces into a single logical interface—a link aggregation group (LAG) or port channel. A LAG is “a group of links that appear to a MAC client as if they were a single link” according to IEEE 802.3ad.
were added to the port channel. For example, if the first operational interface in the port channel is a Tengigabit Ethernet interface, all interfaces at 10000 Mbps are kept up, and all other interfaces that are not set to 10G speed or auto negotiate are disabled. Dell EMC Networking OS brings up the interfaces that are set to auto negotiate so that their speed is identical to the speed of the first channel member in the port channel.
After you enable the port channel, you can place it in Layer 2 or Layer 3 mode. To place the port channel in Layer 2 mode or configure an IP address to place the port channel in Layer 3 mode, use the switchport command. You can configure a port channel as you would a physical interface by enabling or configuring protocols or assigning access control lists.
Hardware address is 00:01:e8:01:46:fa Internet address is 1.1.120.
3 Add the interface to the second port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface Example of Moving an Interface to a New Port Channel The following example shows moving an interface from port channel 4 to port channel 3.
untagged port-channel id number • An interface without tagging enabled can belong to only one VLAN. Remove the port channel with tagging enabled from the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no tagged port-channel id number or no untagged port-channel id number • Identify which port channels are members of VLANs.
ip address ip-address mask [secondary] – ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24). – secondary: the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. Deleting or Disabling a Port Channel To delete or disable a port channel, use the following commands. • Delete a port channel. CONFIGURATION mode no interface portchannel channel-number • Disable a port channel.
• For more information about algorithm choices, refer to the command details in the IP Routing chapter of the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide. Change the Hash algorithm seed value to get better hash value Hash seed is used to compute the hash value. By default hash seed is chassis MAC 32 bits. we can also change the hash seed by the following command. CONFIGURATION mode hash-algorithm seed {seed value} • Change to another algorithm.
NOTE: Non-existing interfaces are excluded from the interface range prompt. NOTE: When creating an interface range, interfaces appear in the order they were entered and are not sorted. The show range command is available under Interface Range mode. This command allows you to display all interfaces that have been validated under the interface range context. The show configuration command is also available under Interface Range mode.
1/1/3/2 , tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 - 1/3/2 DellEMC(conf-if-range-te-1/1/1-1/3/2)# Exclude a Smaller Port Range The following is an example show how the smaller of two port ranges is omitted in the interface-range prompt.
Define the Interface Range The following example shows how to define an interface-range macro named “test” to select Ten Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 5/1 through 5/4. Example of the define interface-range Command for Macros DellEMC(config)# define interface-range test tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 - 1/4/1 Choosing an Interface-Range Macro To use an interface-range macro, use the following command. • Selects the interfaces range to be configured using the values saved in a named interface-range macro.
Traffic statistics: Current Input bytes: 0 Output bytes: 0 Input packets: 0 Output packets: 0 64B packets: 0 Over 64B packets: 0 Over 127B packets: 0 Over 255B packets: 0 Over 511B packets: 0 Over 1023B packets: 0 Error statistics: Input underruns: 0 Input giants: 0 Input throttles: 0 Input CRC: 0 Input IP checksum: 0 Input overrun: 0 Output underruns: 0 Output throttles: 0 m l T q - Change mode Page up Increase refresh interval Quit Rate 0 Bps 0 Bps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 0 0
Non Dell-Qualified Transceivers The system supports Dell-qualified transceivers and only some of the non Dell-qualified transceivers. If the system displays an error message similar to the following, the transceiver is not Dell-qualified. The Dell EMC Networking OS places the interface in error-disabled (operationally down) state.
Example of the show Command The following example shows the show system stack-unit stack-unit number quad-portprofile command. S6010-ON_1#show system stack-unit 1 quad-port-profile Configured fan out profile ports in stack-unit 1 Configured Activated 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 26 26 28 28 30 30 32 32 You can only split the 40G ports in the top row (odd numbered ports) on a 16X40G module.
1 1 1 1 1/15/1 1/15/2 1/15/3 1/15/4 QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 40GBASE-SR4 40GBASE-SR4 40GBASE-SR4 40GBASE-SR4 4829455N01XP 4829455N01XP 4829455N01XP 4829455N01XP Yes Yes Yes Yes Splitting QSFP Ports to SFP+ Ports The platform supports splitting a single 40G QSFP port into four 10G SFP+ ports using one of the supported breakout cables (for a list of supported cables, refer to the Installation Guide or the Release Notes).
After you insert an SFP or SFP+ cable into a QSA connected to a 40 Gigabit port, Dell Networking OS assumes that all the four fanned-out 10 Gigabit ports have plugged-in SFP or SFP+ optical cables. However, the link UP event happens only for the first 10 Gigabit port and you can use only that port for data transfer. As a result, only the first fanned-out port is identified as the active 10 Gigabit port with a speed of 10G or 1G depending on whether you insert an SFP+ or SFP cable respectively.
SFP+ 1/1 Rx Power measurement type =================================== SFP+ 1/1 Temp High Alarm threshold SFP+ 1/1 Voltage High Alarm threshold SFP+ 1/1 Bias High Alarm threshold = OMA = 0.000C = 0.000V = 0.000mA NOTE: In the following show interfaces tengigbitethernet commands, the ports 1/1,2/1, and 3/1 are inactive and no physical SFP or SFP+ connection actually exists on these ports.
You configure link dampening using the dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppress-threshold]] [max-suppress-time]] command on the interface. Following is the detailed explanation of interface state change events: • suppress-threshold— The suppress threshold is a value that triggers a flapping interface to dampen. The system adds penalty when the interface state goes up and down.
Figure 48. Interface State Change Consider an interface periodically flaps as shown above. Every time the interface goes down, a penalty (1024) is added. In the above example, during the first interface flap (flap 1), the penalty is added to 1024. And, the accumulated penalty will exponentially decay based on the set half-life, which is set as 10 seconds in the above example.
accumulated. When the accumulated penalty exceeds the configured suppress threshold (2400), the interface state is set to Error-Disabled state. After the flap (flap 3), the interface flap stops. Then, the accumulated penalty decays exponentially and when it reaches below the set reuse threshold (300), the interface is unsuppressed and the interface state changes to “up” state. Enabling Link Dampening To enable link dampening, use the following command. • Enable link dampening.
Link Dampening Support for XML View the output of the following show commands in XML by adding | display xml to the end of the command. • show interfaces dampening • show interfaces dampening summary • show interfaces interface slot/port/subport Configure MTU Size on an Interface In Dell EMC Networking OS, Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is defined as the entire Ethernet packet (Ethernet header + FCS + payload). The following table lists the range for each transmission media.
Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Ethernet pause frames and threshold settings are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. Ethernet Pause Frames allow for a temporary stop in data transmission. A situation may arise where a sending device may transmit data faster than a destination device can accept it. The destination sends a PAUSE frame back to the source, stopping the sender’s transmission for a period of time.
INTERFACE mode flowcontrol {rx [off | on] tx [off | on] | monitor session-ID} – rx on: enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port. – rx off: enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port. – tx on: enter the keywords tx on to send control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received.
NOTE: When configuring IP MTU on an interface, make sure to set the same or maximum IP MTU value on both ingress and egress interfaces to make IPv4 traffic flow. Port-Pipes A port pipe is a Dell EMC Networking-specific term for the hardware packet-processing elements that handle network traffic to and from a set of front-end I/O ports. The physical, front-end I/O ports are referred to as a port-set. In the command-line interface, a port pipe is entered as port-set port-pipe-number.
duplex {half | full} 7 Disable auto-negotiation on the port. INTERFACE mode no negotiation auto If the speed was set to 1000, do not disable auto-negotiation. 8 Verify configuration changes. INTERFACE mode show config Example of the show interfaces status Command to View Link Status NOTE: The show interfaces status command displays link status, but not administrative status. For both link and administrative status, use the show ip interface command.
end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from autoneg configuration mode mode Specify autoneg mode no Negate a command or set its defaults show Show autoneg configuration information DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-autoneg)#mode ? forced-master Force port to master mode forced-slave Force port to slave mode DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-autoneg)# For details about the speed, duplex, and negotiation auto commands, refer to the Interfaces chapter of the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
Name: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 --More-- Configuring the Interface Sampling Size Although you can enter any value between 30 and 299 seconds (the default), software polling is done once every 15 seconds. So, for example, if you enter “19”, you actually get a sample of the past 15 seconds.
Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:01:9e:d9 Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 1d23h45m Queueing strategy: fifo 0 packets input, 0 bytes Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Chec
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 406 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 2700 Unicasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 3106 packets, 226755 bytes, 0 underruns 133 64-byte pkts, 2973 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 406 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 2700 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 150 seconds): Input 300.
• IP FLOW • IP ACL • IP FIB • L2 ACL • L2 FIB Clearing Interface Counters The counters in the show interfaces command are reset by the clear counters command. This command does not clear the counters any SNMP program captures. To clear the counters, use the following the command. • Clear the counters used in the show interface commands for all VRRP groups, VLANs, and physical interfaces or selected ones. Without an interface specified, the command clears all interface counters.
The compressed configuration will group all the similar looking configuration thereby reducing the size of the configuration. For this release, the compression will be done only for interface related configuration (VLAN & physical interfaces) The following table describes how the standard and the compressed configuration differ: Table 43.
Uncompressed Compressed ! no shutdown interface Vlan 2 ! no ip address no shutdown Compressed config size – 27 lines. ! interface Vlan 3 tagged te 1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 4 tagged te 1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 5 tagged te 1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.
The following is the sample output: DellEMC#write memory compressed ! Jul 30 08:50:26: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %FILEMGR-5-FILESAVED: Copied running-config to startup-config in flash by default copy compressed-config Copy one file, after optimizing and reducing the size of the configuration file, to another location. Dell EMC Networking OS supports IPv4 and IPv6 addressing for FTP, TFTP, and SCP (in the hostip field).
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec,0.
• GVRP traffic redirects • LACP traffic redirects • Common VLT control frames 2 Packets are dropped due to user defined ACLs. 3 Multicast traffic with the TTL value 1. 4 Multicast traffic is not part of any group or special group that has to be processed by the CPU. 5 In addition to the above protocols, the filter processor rule also drops Yellow and Red packets if QoS is configured on the system.
20 IPv4 Routing The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
• Configurations Using UDP Helper • UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses • UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses • Troubleshooting UDP Helper IP Addresses Dell EMC Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks.
2 • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enable the interface.
– permanent: keep the static route in the routing table (if you use the interface option) even if you disable the interface with the route. (optional) – tag tag-value: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. (optional) Example of the show ip route static Command To view the configured routes, use the show ip route static command. DellEMC#show ip route static Destination Gateway ----------------S 2.1.2.0/24 Direct, Nu 0 S 6.1.2.0/24 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.2/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.3/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.
To view the description for the IPv4 or IPv6 static routes, use the show running-config static command. Following is the sample show running-config static output: DellEMC#show running-config static ! ipv6 route 1::/32 GigabitEthernet 2/3 11::1 name Stack-2 ipv6 route 2::/32 GigabitEthernet 2/48 11::1 name Stack-2 ip route 2.2.2.0/24 GigabitEthernet 2/47 name Stack-2 ipv6 route 1001:1001::/64 GigabitEthernet 1/42 2001:2001::1 name ipv6_link_going_to_europe_centre ip route 19.1.1.0/24 19.1.1.
then the sending device lowers the packet size accordingly and resends the packet. Otherwise, the iterative method is followed until the packet can traverse without being fragmented. To use the PMTD in the physical interface, you must allocate and activate the fedgov CAM ACL space using the cam-acl command. The fedgov CAM ACL space is defined as a value (0-8) and you can select the required value to define the space.
for a specific service (such as SSH or BGP) with a SYN ACK, the router waits for a period of time for the ACK packet to be sent from the requesting host that will establish the TCP connection. You can set this duration or interval for which the TCP connection waits to be established to a significantly high value to prevent the device from moving into an out-of-service condition or becoming unresponsive during a SYN flood attack that occurs on the device. You can set the wait time to be 10 seconds or lower.
Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names By default, dynamic resolution of host names (DNS) is disabled. To enable DNS, use the following commands. • Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-lookup • Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use. Example of the show hosts Command To view current bindings, use the show hosts command.
Configuring DNS with Traceroute To configure your switch to perform DNS with traceroute, use the following commands. • Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-lookup • Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] • The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use.
Configuration Tasks for ARP For a complete listing of all ARP-related commands, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Clearing ARP Cache To clear the ARP cache of dynamically learnt ARP information, use the following command. • Clear the ARP caches for all interfaces or for a specific interface by entering the following information. EXEC privilege clear arp-cache [interface | ip ip-address] [no-refresh] – ip ip-address (OPTIONAL): enter the keyword ip then the IP address of the ARP entry you wish to clear. – no-refresh (OPTIONAL): enter the keywords no-refresh to delete the ARP entry from CAM.
Figure 49. ARP Learning via ARP Request Beginning with Dell EMC Networking OS version 8.3.1.0, when you enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system installs a new ARP entry, or updates an existing entry for all received ARP requests. Figure 50. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP.
arp backoff-time The default is 30. • The range is from 1 to 3600. Display all ARP entries learned via gratuitous ARP. EXEC Privilege mode show arp retries ICMP For diagnostics, the internet control message protocol (ICMP) provides routing information to end stations by choosing the best route (ICMP redirect messages) or determining if a router is reachable (ICMP Echo or Echo Reply). ICMP error messages inform the router of problems in a particular packet. These messages are sent only on unicast traffic.
Figure 51. ICMP Redirect Host H is connected to the same Ethernet segment as SW1 and SW2. SW1 and SW2 are multi-layer switches which can route packets. The default gateway of Host H is configured as SW1. Although the best route to the remote branch office host may be through SW2, Host H sends a packet destined for Host R to its default gateway — SW1.
Important Points to Remember • The existing ip directed broadcast command is rendered meaningless if you enable UDP helper on the same interface. • The broadcast traffic rate should not exceed 200 packets per second when you enable UDP helper. • You may specify a maximum of 16 UDP ports.
1 It is flooded on VLAN 101 without changing the destination address because the forwarding process is Layer 2. 2 If you enabled UDP helper, the system changes the destination IP address to the configured broadcast address 1.1.255.255 and forwards the packet to VLAN 100. 3 Packet 2 is also forwarded to the ingress interface with an unchanged destination address because it does not have broadcast address configured. Figure 52.
Packet 2 is sent from a host on VLAN 101. It has broadcast MAC address and a destination IP address that matches the configured broadcast address on VLAN 101. In this case, Packet 2 is flooded on VLAN 101 with the destination address unchanged because the forwarding process is Layer 2. If you enabled UDP helper, the packet is flooded on VLAN 100 as well. Figure 54.
21 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell EMC Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
Extended Address Space The address format is extended from 32 bits to 128 bits. This not only provides room for all anticipated needs, it allows for the use of a hierarchical address space structure to optimize global addressing. Stateless Autoconfiguration When a booting device comes up in IPv6 and asks for its network prefix, the device can get the prefix (or prefixes) from an IPv6 router on its link.
• Flow Label (20 bits) • Payload Length (16 bits) • Next Header (8 bits) • Hop Limit (8 bits) • Source Address (128 bits) • Destination Address (128 bits) IPv6 provides for extension headers. Extension headers are used only if necessary. There can be no extension headers, one extension header or more than one extension header in an IPv6 packet. Extension headers are defined in the Next Header field of the preceding IPv6 header.
The platforms uses only IPv6 /0 – 0/64 prefix route entries. Support for /0 – /128 IPv6 prefix route entries is available, although they are not utilized. A total of eight pools or regions are present with each region containing 1024 210-bit entries (supports up to 0/64 prefix). To support up to /128 prefixes, you must use 2 banks (410-bit entries). It is necessary to partition the LPM. The optimized booting functionality does not use Openflow and therefore SDN support is not available.
Next Header (8 bits) The Next Header field identifies the next header’s type. If an Extension header is used, this field contains the type of Extension header (as shown in the following table). If the next header is a transmission control protocol (TCP) or user datagram protocol (UDP) header, the value in this field is the same as for IPv4. The Extension header is located between the IP header and the TCP or UDP header. The following lists the Next Header field values.
Source Address (128 bits) The Source Address field contains the IPv6 address for the packet originator. Destination Address (128 bits) The Destination Address field contains the intended recipient’s IPv6 address. This can be either the ultimate destination or the address of the next hop router. Extension Header Fields Extension headers are used only when necessary. Due to the streamlined nature of the IPv6 header, adding extension headers do not severely impact performance.
10 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address identifying the unknown option type. 11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination.
the same IPv6 address to a particular computer, and never to assign that IP address to another computer. This allows static IPv6 addresses to be configured in one place, without having to specifically configure each computer on the network in a different way. In IPv6, every interface, whether using static or dynamic address assignments, also receives a local-link address automatically in the fe80::/64 subnet.
Feature and Functionality Documentation and Chapter Location IS-IS for IPv6 support for redistribution Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. ISIS for IPv6 support for distribute lists and administrative distance Intermediate System to Intermediate System OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) OSPFv3 in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
• Error reporting messages indicate when the forwarding or delivery of the packet failed at the destination or intermediate node. These messages include Destination Unreachable, Packet Too Big, Time Exceeded and Parameter Problem messages. • Informational messages provide diagnostic functions and additional host functions, such as Neighbor Discovery and Multicast Listener Discovery. These messages also include Echo Request and Echo Reply messages.
NOTE: To avoid problems with network discovery, Dell EMC Networking recommends configuring the static route last or assigning an IPv6 address to the interface and assigning an address to the peer (the forwarding router’s address) less than 10 seconds apart. With ARP, each node broadcasts ARP requests on the entire link. This approach causes unnecessary processing by uninterested nodes.
• multicast addresses • invalid host addresses If you specify this information in the IPv6 RDNSS configuration, a DNS error is displayed. Example for Configuring an IPv6 Recursive DNS Server The following example configures a RDNNS server with an IPv6 address of 1000::1 and a lifetime of 1 second.
Remaining lifetime: infinite Global Anycast address(es): Joined Group address(es): ff02::1 ff02::2 ff02::1:ff00:12 ff02::1:ff8b:7570 ND MTU is 0 ICMP redirects are not sent DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3 ND reachable time is 20120 milliseconds ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND adve
The CAM space is allotted in FP blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. There are 16 FP blocks, but the System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated. You must enter the ipv6acl allocation as a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10). All other profile allocations can use either even or odd-numbered ranges.
• Enter the IPv6 Address for the device. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ipv6 address ipv6 address/mask – ipv6 address: x:x:x:x::x – mask: The prefix length is from 0 to 128 NOTE: IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits. Separate each group by a colon (:). Omitting zeros is accepted as described in Addressing. Assigning a Static IPv6 Route To configure IPv6 static routes, use the ipv6 route command.
NOTE: IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, where each group is separated by a colon (:). Omitting zeros is accepted as described in Addressing. SNMP over IPv6 You can configure SNMP over IPv6 transport so that an IPv6 host can perform SNMP queries and receive SNMP notifications from a device running Dell EMC Networking OS IPv6. The Dell EMC Networking OS SNMP-server commands for IPv6 have been extended to support IPv6.
– For all brief summary of IPv6 status and configuration, enter the keyword brief. – For all IPv6 configured interfaces, enter the keyword configured. – For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. – For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. – For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
– To display information about Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routes, enter ospf. – To display information about Routing Information Protocol (RIP), enter rip. – To display information about static IPv6 routes, enter static. – To display information about an IPv6 Prefix lists, enter list and the prefix-list name. Examples of the show ipv6 route Commands The following example shows the show ipv6 route summary command.
– For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. – For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. Example of the show running-config interface Command DellEMC#show run int Te 2/2/1 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2/1 no ip address ipv6 address 3:4:5:6::8/24 shutdown DellEMC# Clearing IPv6 Routes To clear routes from the IPv6 routing table, use the following command.
configure terminal 2 Enable the IPv6 RA guard. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 nd ra-guard enable 3 Create the policy. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name 4 Define the role of the device attached to the port. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode device-role {host | router} Use the keyword host to set the device role as host. Use the keyword router to set the device role as router. 5 Set the hop count limit.
mtu value 13 Set the advertised reachability time. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode reachable—time value The reachability time range is from 0 to 3,600,000 milliseconds. 14 Set the advertised retransmission time. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode retrans—timer value The retransmission time range is from 100 to 4,294,967,295 milliseconds. 15 Display the configurations applied on the RA guard policy mode.
Example of the show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy Command DellEMC#show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy test ipv6 nd ra-guard policy test device-role router hop-limit maximum 1 match ra ipv6-access-list access other-config-flag on router-preference maximum medium trusted-port Interfaces : Te 1/1/1 DellEMC# Monitoring IPv6 RA Guard To debug IPv6 RA guard, use the following command. EXEC Privilege mode debug ipv6 nd ra-guard [interface slot/port[/subport] | count value] The count range is from 1 to 65534.
22 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
• iSCSI QoS — A user-configured iSCSI class of service (CoS) profile is applied to all iSCSI traffic. Classifier rules are used to direct the iSCSI data traffic to queues that can be given preferential QoS treatment over other data passing through the switch. Preferential treatment helps to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause dropped iSCSI packets. • iSCSI DCBx TLVs are supported.
Monitoring iSCSI Traffic Flows The switch snoops iSCSI session-establishment and termination packets by installing classifier rules that trap iSCSI protocol packets to the CPU for examination. Devices that initiate iSCSI sessions usually use well-known TCP ports 3260 or 860 to contact targets. When you enable iSCSI optimization, by default the switch identifies IP packets to or from these ports as iSCSI traffic.
If more than 256 simultaneous sessions are logged continuously, the following message displays indicating the queue rate limit has been reached: %STKUNIT2-M:CP %iSCSI-5-ISCSI_OPT_MAX_SESS_EXCEEDED: New iSCSI Session Ignored: ISID 400001370000 InitiatorName - iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:dt-brcd-cna-2 TargetName iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:4-52aed6-b90d9446c-162466364804fa49-wj-v1 TSIH - 0" NOTE: If you are using EqualLogic or Compellent storage arrays, more than 256 simultaneous iSCSI sessions are possible.
including jumbo frames and flow-control on all ports; no storm control and spanning-tree port fast to be enabled on the port of detection. After you execute the iscsi profile-compellent command, the following actions occur: • Jumbo frame size is set to the maximum for all interfaces on all ports and port-channels, if it is not already enabled. • Spanning-tree portfast is enabled on the interface. • Unicast storm control is disabled on the interface.
Default iSCSI Optimization Values The following table lists the default values for the iSCSI optimization feature. Table 45. iSCSI Optimization Defaults Parameter Default Value iSCSI Optimization global setting Disabled. iSCSI CoS mode (802.1p priority queue mapping) dot1p priority 4 without the remark setting when you enable iSCSI. If you do not enable iSCSI, this feature is disabled.
CONFIGURATION mode iscsi enable 3 For a DCB environment: Configure iSCSI Optimization. EXEC Privilege mode iSCSI configuration: copy CONFIG_TEMPLATE/iSCSI_DCB_Config running-config. The configuration files are stored in the flash memory in the CONFIG_TEMPLATE file. NOTE: DCB/DCBx is enabled when you apply the iSCSI configuration in step 3. If you manually apply the iSCSI configuration by following steps 1 and 2, enable link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) before enabling iSCSI in step 2.
• dscp dscp-value: specifies the DSCP value assigned to incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The range is from 0 to 63. The default is: the DSCP value in ingress packets is not changed. • 8 remark: marks incoming iSCSI packets with the configured dot1p or DSCP value when they egress the switch. The default is: the dot1 and DSCP values in egress packets are not changed. (Optional) Set the aging time for iSCSI session monitoring. CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi aging time time.
-----------------------------------------------iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports: -----------------------------------------------TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 The following example shows the show iscsi session command. VLT PEER1 DellEMC#show iscsi session Session 0: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.
23 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell EMC Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
• area address — within your routing domain or area, each area must have a unique area value. The first byte is called the authority and format indicator (AFI). • system address — the router’s MAC address. • N-selector — this is always 0. The following illustration is an example of the ISO-style address to show the address format IS-IS uses. In this example, the first five bytes (47.0005.0001) are the area address. The system portion is 000c.000a.4321 and the last byte is always 0. Figure 59.
Interface Support MT IS-IS is supported on physical Ethernet interfaces, physical synchronous optical network technologies (SONET) interfaces, portchannel interfaces (static and dynamic using LACP), and virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. Adjacencies Adjacencies on point-to-point interfaces are formed as usual, where IS-IS routers do not implement MT extensions.
IPv6 Reachability and IPv6 Interface Address. Also, a new IPv6 protocol identifier has also been included in the supported TLVs. The new TLVs use the extended metrics and up/down bit semantics. Multi-topology IS-IS adds TLVs: • MT TLV — contains one or more Multi-Topology IDs in which the router participates. This TLV is included in IIH and the first fragment of an LSP. • MT Intermediate Systems TLV — appears for every topology a node supports.
Configuration Tasks for IS-IS The following describes the configuration tasks for IS-IS. • Enabling IS-IS • Configure Multi-Topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) • Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart • Changing LSP Attributes • Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style • Configuring IS-IS Cost • Changing the IS-Type • Controlling Routing Updates • Configuring Authentication Passwords • Setting the Overload Bit • Debugging IS-IS Enabling IS-IS By default, IS-IS is not enabled.
4 • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enter an IPv4 Address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask Assign an IP address and mask to the interface.
Accept wide metrics: DellEMC# none To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
4 Implement a wide metric-style globally. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode isis ipv6 metric metric-value [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2] To configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be between 0 and 16,777,215. Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart To enable IS-IS graceful restart globally, use the following commands. Additionally, you can implement optional commands to enable the graceful restart settings. • Enable graceful restart on ISIS processes.
– adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. – manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Examples of the show isis graceful-restart detail Command NOTE: If this timer expires before the synchronization has completed, the restarting router sends the overload bit in the LSP.
LSP Interval: 33 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Restart Capable Neighbors: 2, In Start: 0, In Restart: 0 DellEMC# Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information. LSP attributes include the generation interval, maximum transmission unit (MTU) or size, and the refresh interval. You can modify the LSP attribute defaults, but it is not necessary.
Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style All IS-IS links or interfaces are associated with a cost that is used in the shortest path first (SPF) calculations. The possible cost varies depending on the metric style supported. If you configure narrow, transition, or narrow transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 63. If you configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 16,777,215.
Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: Accept narrow metrics: Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: DellEMC# level-1-2 level-1-2 none none Configuring the IS-IS Cost When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value could be affected. For each interface with IS-IS enabled, you can assign a cost or metric that is used in the link state calculation. To change the metric or cost of the interface, use the following commands. • Assign an IS-IS metric.
Changing the IS-Type To change the IS-type, use the following commands. You can configure the system to act as a Level 1 router, a Level 1-2 router, or a Level 2 router. To change the IS-type for the router, use the following commands. • Configure IS-IS operating level for a router. ROUTER ISIS mode is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} • Default is level-1-2. Change the IS-type for the IS-IS process.
– For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. Prefix lists are applied to incoming or outgoing routes and routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists or Dell EMC Networking OS does not install the route in the routing table. The prefix lists are globally applied on all interfaces running IS-IS.
• Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes. ROUTER ISIS-AF IPV6 mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] Enter the type of interface and the interface information: – For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. – For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. – For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
ROUTER ISIS mode redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric value] [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: – process-id the range is from 1 to 65535. – level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. – metric value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. – match external the range is from 1 or 2.
Configuring Authentication Passwords You can assign an authentication password for routers in Level 1 and for routers in Level 2. Because Level 1 and Level 2 routers do not communicate with each other, you can assign different passwords for Level 1 routers and for Level 2 routers. However, if you want the routers in the level to communicate with each other, configure them with the same password. To configure a simple text password, use the following commands.
eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000A 0xF963 eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.00-00 0x00000002 0xD1A7 IS-IS Level-2 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000006 0xC38A eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000E 0x53BF eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.
To disable a specific debug command, enter the keyword no then the debug command. For example, to disable debugging of IS-IS updates, use the no debug isis updates-packets command. To disable all IS-IS debugging, use the no debug isis command. To disable all debugging, use the undebug all command. IS-IS Metric Styles The following sections provide additional information about the IS-IS metric styles.
Table 48. Metric Value When the Metric Style Changes Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value wide narrow default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition truncated value (the truncated value appears in the LSP only). The original isis metric value is displayed in the show config and show running-config commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style.
Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style. Moving to transition and then to another metric style produces different results. Table 49.
Level-1 Metric Style Level-2 Metric Style Resulting Metric Value wide transition narrow truncated value wide transition narrow transition truncated value wide transition transition truncated value Sample Configurations The following configurations are examples for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations.
IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. DellEMC(conf-if-te-3/17/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17/1 ip address 24.3.1.
24 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell EMC Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic. Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by Dell EMC Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
LACP Modes Dell EMC Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. • Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. • Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
The default is 32768. LACP Configuration Tasks The following configuration tasks apply to LACP. • Creating a LAG • Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic • Setting the LACP Long Timeout • Monitoring and Debugging LACP • Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. • Create a dynamic port channel (LAG).
DellEMC(conf)#interface TenGigabitethernet 4/15/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-4/15/1)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-4/15/1)#port-channel-protocol lacp DellEMC(conf-if-te-4/15/1-lacp)#port-channel 32 mode active ...
• Debug LACP, including configuration and events. EXEC mode [no] debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface [in | out]]]] Shared LAG State Tracking Shared LAG state tracking provides the flexibility to bring down a port channel (LAG) based on the operational state of another LAG. At any time, only two LAGs can be a part of a group such that the fate (status) of one LAG depends on the other LAG.
Example of LAGs in the Same Failover Group DellEMC#config DellEMC(conf)#port-channel failover-group DellEMC(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 To view the failover group configuration, use the show running-configuration po-failover-group command. DellEMC#show running-config po-failover-group ! port-channel failover-group group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 As shown in the following illustration, LAGs 1 and 2 are members of a failover group.
Important Points about Shared LAG State Tracking The following is more information about shared LAG state tracking. • • • • • This feature is available for static and dynamic LAGs. Only a LAG can be a member of a failover group. You can configure shared LAG state tracking on one side of a link or on both sides. If a LAG that is part of a failover group is deleted, the failover group is deleted. If a LAG moves to the Down state due to this feature, its members may still be in the Up state.
Port is part of Port-channel 10 Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Current address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Interface Index is 109101113 Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Slave Flowcontrol rx on tx on ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:02:11 Queueing strategy: fifo Input statistics: 132 packets, 163668 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts,
Figure 64.
Figure 65.
Figure 66.
Summary of the LAG Configuration on Bravo Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#int port-channel 10 Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no ip add Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int tengig 3/21/1 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21/1-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode activ
Figure 67.
Figure 68.
Figure 69. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
25 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table. • Clearing the MAC Address Table • Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries • Configuring a Static MAC Address • Displaying the MAC Address Table Clearing the MAC Address Table You may clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries. To clear a MAC address table, use the following command.
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. • Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table.
In this case, the configuration is still present in the running-config and show output. Remove the configuration before re-applying a MAC learning limit with a lower value. Also, ensure that you can view the Syslog messages on your session. NOTE: The CAM-check failure message beginning in Dell EMC Networking OS version 8.3.1.0 is different from versions 8.2.1.
When you enable sticky mac on an interface, dynamically-learned MAC addresses do not age, even if you enabled mac-learninglimit dynamic. If you configured mac-learning-limit and mac-learning-limit dynamic and you disabled sticky MAC, any dynamically-learned MAC addresses ages. mac learning-limit station-move The mac learning-limit station-move command allows a MAC address already in the table to be learned from another interface.
Setting Station Move Violation Actions no-station-move is the default behavior. You can configure the system to take an action if a station move occurs using one the following options with the mac learning-limit command. To display a list of interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation actions, use the following commands. • Generate a system log message indicating a station move. INTERFACE mode station-move-violation log • Shut down the first port to learn the MAC address.
Enabling port security You can enable or disable port security feature globally on the Dell EMC Networking OS. You can configure all the MAC address learning limit configurations, only if the port security is enabled on the Dell EMC Networking OS. If the port security feature is disabled, all the interface level configurations are reset and all dynamically learnt MAC addresses on the interfaces configured with MAC address learning limit are cleared.
Figure 71. Configuring the mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp Command Configure Redundant Pairs Networks that employ switches that do not support the spanning tree protocol (STP) — for example, networks with digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAM) — cannot have redundant links between switches because they create switching loops (as shown in the following illustration).
Figure 72. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command. Initially, the primary interface is active and transmits traffic and the backup interface remains down. If the primary fails for any reason, the backup transitions to an active Up state. If the primary interface fails and later comes back up, it remains as the backup interface for the redundant pair.
Important Points about Configuring Redundant Pairs • • • • You may not configure any interface to be a backup for more than one interface, no interface can have more than one backup, and a backup interface may not have a backup interface. The active or backup interface can be a LAG, but it cannot be a member port of a LAG. The active and standby do not have to be of the same type (1G, 10G, and so on).
DellEMC#configure DellEMC(conf)#interface port-channel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)#switchport backup interface port-channel 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_WARN: Do not run any Layer2 protocols on Po 1 and Po 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-STATE_ACT_STBY: Changed interface state to standby: Po 2 DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# DellEMC# DellEMC#show interfaces switchport backup Interface Status Paired Inte
In the event of a far-end failure, the device stops receiving frames and, after the specified time interval, assumes that the far-end is not available. The connecting line protocol is brought down so that upper layer protocols can detect the neighbor unavailability faster. FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive.
Configuring FEFD You can configure FEFD for all interfaces from CONFIGURATION mode, or on individual interfaces from INTERFACE mode. To enable FEFD globally on all interfaces, use the following command. • Enable FEFD globally on all interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode fefd-global To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
fefd [mode {aggressive | normal}] • Disable FEFD protocol on one interface. INTERFACE mode fefd disable Disabling an interface shuts down all protocols working on that interface’s connected line. It does not delete your previous FEFD configuration which you can enable again at any time. To set up and activate two or more connected interfaces, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-INACTIVE: Changed Vlan interface state to inactive: Vl 1 2w1d22h : FEFD state on Te 4/1/1 changed from Bi-directional to Unknown DellEMC#debug fefd packets DellEMC#2w1d22h : FEFD packet sent via interface Te 1/1/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port-Subport(Te 1/1/1) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port-Subport(Te 4/1/1) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) 2w1d22h : FEFD packet received on interface Te 4/1/1 Sender stat
26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview LLDP — defined by IEEE 802.1AB — is a protocol that enables a local area network (LAN) device to advertise its configuration and receive configuration information from adjacent LLDP-enabled LAN infrastructure devices.
Table 52. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Types Type TLV Description 0 End of LLDPDU Marks the end of a LLDPDU. 1 Chassis ID An administratively assigned name that identifies the LLDP agent. 2 Port ID An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received. 3 Time to Live An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received.
Figure 76. Organizationally Specific TLV IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell EMC Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 53. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell EMC Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
Type TLV Description in the Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of LLDP, but is available and mandatory (non-configurable) in the LLDPMED implementation. 127 Power via MDI Dell EMC Networking supports the LLDPMED protocol, which recommends that Power via MDI TLV be not implemented, and therefore Dell EMC Networking implements Extended Power via MDI TLV only.
Table 54. TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED) Organizationally Specific TLVs Type SubType TLV Description 127 1 LLDP-MED Capabilities Indicates: • • • whether the transmitting device supports LLDP-MED what LLDP-MED TLVs it supports LLDP device class 127 2 Network Policy Indicates the application type, VLAN ID, Layer 2 Priority, and DSCP value.
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP-MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support. LLDP-MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV. • • The value of the LLDP-MED capabilities field in the TLV is a 2–octet bitmap, each bit represents an LLDP-MED capability (as shown in the following table). The possible values of the LLDP-MED device type are shown in the following.
• VLAN ID • VLAN tagged or untagged status • Layer 2 priority • DSCP value An integer represents the application type (the Type integer shown in the following table), which indicates a device function for which a unique network policy is defined. An individual LLDP-MED network policy TLV is generated for each application type that you specify with the Dell EMC Networking OS CLI (Advertising TLVs).
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. • Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell EMC Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
• LLDP is not hitless. LLDP Compatibility • Spanning tree and force10 ring protocol “blocked” ports allow LLDPDUs. • 802.1X controlled ports do not allow LLDPDUs until the connected device is authenticated. CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations All LLDP configuration commands are available in PROTOCOL LLDP mode, which is a sub-mode of the CONFIGURATION mode and INTERFACE mode. • Configurations made at the CONFIGURATION level are global; that is, they affect all interfaces on the system.
Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command. • Disable LLDP globally or for an interface. disable To undo an LLDP configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1 Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol lldp 2 Enter LLDP management-interface mode.
To advertise TLVs, use the following commands. 1 Enter LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2 Advertise one or more TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode advertise {dcbx-appln-tlv | dcbx-tlv | dot3-tlv | interface-port-desc | management-tlv | med } Include the keyword for each TLV you want to advertise. • For management TLVs: system-capabilities, system-description. • For 802.1 TLVs: port-protocol-vlan-id, port-vlan-id . • For 802.3 TLVs: max-frame-size.
Storing and Viewing Unrecognized LLDP TLVs Dell EMC Networking OS provides support to store unrecognized (reserved and organizational specific) LLDP TLVs. Also, support is extended to retrieve the stored unrecognized TLVs using SNMP. When the incoming TLV from LLDP neighbors is not recognized, the TLV is categorized as unrecognized TLV.
Viewing the LLDP Configuration To view the LLDP configuration, use the following command. • Display the LLDP configuration. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode show config Examples of Viewing LLDP Configurations The following example shows viewing an LLDP global configuration.
Example of Viewing Detailed Information Advertised by Neighbors DellEMC(conf)#do show lldp neighbors detail ======================================================================== Local Interface FortyGigE 1/1/1 has 2 neighbors Total Frames Out: 3 Total Frames In: 8 Total Neighbor information Age outs: 0 Total Multiple Neighbors Detected: 0 Total Frames Discarded: 0 Total In Error Frames: 0 Total Unrecognized TLVs: 960 Total TLVs Discarded: 16 Next packet will be sent after 9 seconds The neighbors are give
Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index: 1 Remote TTL: 300 Information valid for next 201 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor: 00:01:39 UnknownTLVList: OrgUnknownTLVList: ((00-01-66),127, 4) ((00-01-66),126, 4) ((00-01-66),125, 4) ((00-01-66),124, ((00-01-66),122, 4) ((00-01-66),121, 4) ((00-01-66),120, 4) ((00-01-66),119, --------------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 4c:76:25:f4:ab:02 Remote Por
advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Configuring LLDP Notification Interval This implementation has been introduced to adhere to the IEEE 802.1AB standard. This implementation allows a user to configure the LLDP notification interval between 5 (default) and 3600 seconds. NOTE: Before implementation of this feature, notification messages were not throttled.
CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode no mode Example of Configuring a Single Mode R1(conf)#protocol lldp R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#mode ? rx Rx only tx Tx only R1(conf-lldp)#mode tx R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size adverti
advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description multiplier 5 no disable R1(conf-lldp)#no multiplier R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Debugging LLDP You can view the TLVs that your system is sending and receiving.
The following is an example of LLDPDU with both (Reserved and Organizational specific) unrecognized TLVs.
MIB Object Category LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description statsFramesInTotal lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal Total number of LLDP frames received through the port. statsFramesOutTotal lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal Total number of LLDP frames transmitted through the port. statsTLVsDiscardedTotal lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal Total number of TLVs received then discarded. statsTLVsUnrecognizedTotal lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTot Total number of all TLVs the local al agent does not recognize.
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MIB Object interface numbering subtype Local lldpLocManAddrIfSubtype Remote lldpRemManAddrIfSubtype Local lldpLocManAddrIfId Remote lldpRemManAddrIfId Local lldpLocManAddrOID Remote lldpRemManAddrOID interface number OID Table 60. LLDP 802.
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP-MED MIB Object lldpXMedRemConfigTLVsTx Enable LLDP-MED Class Type 2 Network Policy Application Type Unknown Policy Flag Tagged Flag VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP Value 3 Location Identifier Location Data Format Location ID Data 4 Extended Power via MDI Power Device Type Power Source Local lldpXMedLocDeviceClass Remote lldpXMedRemDeviceClass Local lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyAp pType Remote lldpXMedRemMediaPolicyA ppType Local lldpXMedLocMedi
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP-MED MIB Object lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowe rSource Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEPo werSource lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPow erSource Power Priority Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowe rPriority lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPort PDPriority Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEPo werPriority lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPow erPriority Power Value Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPort PowerAv lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowe rReq Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEPo werAv lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPow erReq 560 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLD
27 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
With Multicast NLB mode, the data forwards to all the servers based on the port specified using the following Layer 2 multicast command in CONFIGURATION MODE: mac-address-table static multicast vlan output-range , Limitations of the NLB Feature The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: • The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN.
CONFIGURATION mode ip vlan-flooding There might be some ARP table entries that are resolved through ARP packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries.
28 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
RPs advertise each (S,G) in its domain in type, length, value (TLV) format. The total number of TLVs contained in the SA is indicated in the “Entry Count” field. SA messages are transmitted every 60 seconds, and immediately when a new source is detected. Figure 83.
active sources in the area of the other RPs. If any of the RPs fail, IP routing converges and one of the RPs becomes the active RP in more than one area. New sources register with the backup RP. Receivers join toward the new RP and connectivity is maintained. Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MSDP is in accordance with RFC 3618 and Anycast RP is in accordance with RFC 3446. Configure Multicast Source Discovery Protocol Configuring MSDP is a four-step process.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86.
Figure 87. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1 Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2 Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source Examples of Configuring and Viewing MSDP R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
R3(conf)#do show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Description Local Addr State Source SA Up/Down To view details about a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command in EXEC privilege mode. Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
show ip msdp sa-limit If the total number of active sources is already larger than the limit when limiting is applied, the sources that are already in Dell EMC Networking OS are not discarded. To enforce the limit in such a situation, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache command to clear all existing entries. Clearing the Source-Active Cache To clear the source-active cache, use the following command. • Clear the SA cache of all, local, or rejected entries, or entries for a specific group.
Figure 88.
Figure 89.
Figure 90. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check.
GroupAddr 229.0.50.2 229.0.50.3 229.0.50.4 SourceAddr 24.0.50.2 24.0.50.3 24.0.50.4 RPAddr 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 DellEMC#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 Expire 73 73 73 UpTime 00:13:49 00:13:49 00:13:49 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.
R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 1 rejected SAs received, cache-size 1000 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 00:02:20 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local Reason Redistribute Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1 OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache.
Example of Verifying the System is not Advertising Local Sources In the following example, R1 stops advertising source 10.11.4.2. Because it is already in the SA cache of R3, the entry remains there until it expires. [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.3 list mylocalfilter R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended mylocalfilter seq 5 deny ip host 239.0.0.1 host 10.11.4.
Output (S,G) filter: none [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.3 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(0) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Inactive Up/Down Time: 00:00:03 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Clearing Peer Statistics To clear the peer statistics, use the following command. • Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all peer statistics.
03:17:10 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, 03:17:27 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, Input (S,G) filter: none Output (S,G) filter: none rcvd Keepalive msg sent Source Active msg MSDP with Anycast RP Anycast RP uses MSDP with PIM-SM to allow more than one active group to use RP mapping.
Figure 91. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1 In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2 Make this address the RP for the group.
4 Peer each RP with every other RP using MSDP, specifying the unique Loopback address as the connect-source. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer 5 Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP.
interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.11/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.11/32 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 ip msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.
The following example shows an R3 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.32/24 no shutdown interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/41/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.1/32 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 MSDP Sample Configuration: R2 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.
ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface ManagementEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.11.80.3/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.
32 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Dell Networking OS Supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a Layer 3 protocol that IPv6 routers use to learn of the multicast receivers that are directly connected to them and the groups in which the receivers are interested. Multicast routing protocols (like PIM) use the information learned from MLD to route multicast traffic to all interested receivers.
Joining a Multicast Group The Querier periodically sends a General Query to the all-nodes multicast address FF02::1. A host that wants to join a multicast group responds to the general query with a report that contains the group address; the report is also addressed to the group (in the IPv6 Destination Address field). To avoid duplicate reporting, any host that hears a report from another host for the same group in which it itself is interested cancels its report for that group.
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +. -+ . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ Version 2 multicast listener reports are sent by IP nodes to report (to neighboring routers) the current multicast listening state, or changes in the multicast listening state, of their interfaces.
| | * Multicast Address * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +-+ . . . . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | . . . Auxiliary Data . . .
ipv6 mld query-interval Reducing Host Response Burstiness General Queries contain a Query Response Interval value, which is the amount of time the host has to respond to a general query. Hosts set a timer to a random number less than the Query Response Interval upon receiving a general query, and send a report when the timer expires. Increasing this value spreads host responses over a greater period of time, and so reduces response burstiness.
ipv6 mld explicit-tracking Reducing Leave Latency Leave Latency is the amount of time after the last host leaves the MLD group that the router stops forwarding traffic for that group. Latency is introduced because the router attempts several times to determine if there are any remaining members before stopping traffic for the group. The Querier sends a Multicast-Address-Specific Query upon receiving a Done message to ascertain whether there are any remain receivers for a group.
30 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
• Adding and Removing Interfaces • Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances • Influencing MSTP Root Selection • Interoperate with Non-Dell Bridges • Changing the Region Name or Revision • Modifying Global Parameters • Modifying the Interface Parameters • Setting STP path cost as constant • Configuring an EdgePort • Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change • MSTP Sample Configurations • Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell EMC Networking OS
Related Configuration Tasks The following are the related configuration tasks for MSTP.
• spanning-tree 0 To remove an interface from the MSTP topology, use the no spanning-tree 0 command. Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances To create multiple spanning tree instances, use the following command. A single MSTI provides no more benefit than RSTP. To take full advantage of MSTP, create multiple MSTIs and map VLANs to them. • Create an MSTI. PROTOCOL MSTP mode msti Specify the keyword vlan then the VLANs that you want to participate in the MSTI.
Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.384 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e806.953e Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e809.c24a Designated port id is 128.384, designated path cost 20000 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU (MRecords): sent 39291, received 7547 The port is not in the Edge port mode DellEMC#show spanning-tree msti 1 MSTI 1 VLANs mapped 100 Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e806.
MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 MSTI 2 bridge-priority 0 Interoperate with Non-Dell Bridges Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one MSTP region. A region is a combination of three unique qualities: • Name is a mnemonic string you assign to the region. The default region name is null. • Revision is a 2-byte number. The default revision number OS is 0. • VLAN-to-instance mapping is the placement of a VLAN in an MSTI.
NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends that only experienced network administrators change MSTP parameters. Poorly planned modification of MSTP parameters can negatively affect network performance. To change the MSTP parameters, use the following commands on the root bridge. 1 Change the forward-delay parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode forward-delay seconds The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds. 2 Change the hello-time parameter.
Modifying the Interface Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost is a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. • Port priority influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
Setting STP path cost as constant You can set the path cost to be constant for port-channel regardless of the operation status of the port-channel member ports. To set the STP path cost, use the port-channel path-cost custom command from the PROTOCOL SPANNING-TREE mode. The following is the example configuration: DELLEMC(conf)#protocol spanning-tree pvst DELLEMC(conf-pvst)#port-channel path-cost custom This command is support in all STP modes such as STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST.
spanning-tree mstp edge-port spanning-tree MSTI 1 priority 144 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Dell EMC Networking OS has an optimized MAC address flush mechanism for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ that flushes addresses only when necessary, which allows for faster convergence during topology changes. However, you may activate the flushing mechanism defined by 802.
MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1,31/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/21,31/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/21,31/1 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1
! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1,1/1/4/1 no shutdown (Step 1) protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable name Tahiti revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1,31/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet
no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1,1/1/5/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1,1/1/5/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1,1/1/5/2 no shutdown (Step 1) protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable name Tahiti revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/11/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet
spanning-tree spanning-tree spanning-tree spanning-tree MSTi MSTi MSTi MSTi vlan 1 100 instance 2 vlan 2 200 vlan 2 300 (Step 2) interface 1/0/31 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit interface 1/0/32 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit (Step 3) interface vlan 100 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configura
• • – Does the debug log indicate that packets are coming from a “Different Region”? If so, one of the key parameters is not matching. MSTP Region Name and Revision. – The configured name and revisions must be identical among all the routers. – Is the Region name blank? That may mean that a name was configured on one router and but was not configured or was configured differently on another router (spelling and capitalization counts). MSTP Instances.
INST 2: Flags: 0x70, Reg Root: 32768:0001.e8d5.
31 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
Protocol Ethernet Address OSPF 01:00:5e:00:00:05 01:00:5e:00:00:06 RIP 01:00:5e:00:00:09 NTP 01:00:5e:00:01:01 VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. • Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. • If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic.
NOTE: The Dell EMC Networking OS waits at least 30 seconds between stopping and starting IGMP join processing. You may experience this delay when manipulating the limit after it is reached. When the multicast route limit is reached, the following displays: 3w1d13h: %RPM0-P:RP2 %PIM-3-PIM_TIB_LIMIT: PIM TIB limit reached. No new routes will be learnt until TIB level falls below low watermark. 3w1d13h: %RPM0-P:RP2 %PIM-3-PIM_TIB_LIMIT: PIM TIB below low watermark. Route learning will begin.
Figure 94. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 64. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31/1 • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
Preventing a PIM Router from Forming an Adjacency To prevent a router from participating in PIM (for example, to configure stub multicast routing), use the following command. • Prevent a router from participating in PIM. INTERFACE mode ip pim neighbor-filter Setting a Threshold for Switching to the SPT The functionality to specify a threshold for switchover to the shortest path trees (SPTs) is available on the system.
Figure 95. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 66. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31/1 • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
Important Points to Remember • Destination address of the mtrace query message can be either a unicast or a multicast address. NOTE: When you use mtrace to trace a specific multicast group, the query is sent with the group's address as the destination. Retries of the query use the unicast address of the receiver. • When you issue an mtrace without specifying a group address (weak mtrace), the destination address is considered as the unicast address of the receiver.
– Forwarding code — error code as present in the response blocks – Source Network/Mask — source mask Example of the mtrace Command to View the Network Path The following is an example of tracing a multicast route. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.3 to destination 1.1.1.1 via group 226.0.0.
The response data block filled in by the last-hop router contains a Forwarding code field. Forwarding code can be added at any node and is not restricted to the last hop router. This field is used to record error codes before forwarding the response to the next neighbor in the path towards the source. In a response data packet, the following error codes are supported: Table 68.
Scenario Output -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command specifying the source multicast tree and multicast group without specifying the destination. Mtrace traces the complete path traversing through the multicast group to reach the source. The output displays the destination and the first hop (-1) as 0 to indicate any PIM enabled interface on the node. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
Scenario Output 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command by providing the source and multicast information. However, if the multicast group is a shared group (*,G), then mtrace traces the path of the shared tree until it reaches the RP. The source mask field reflects the shared tree that is being used to trace the path.
Scenario Output -3 10.10.10.1 PIM No route default ----------------------------------------------------------------- If a multicast tree is not formed due to a configuration issue (for example, PIM is not enabled on one of the interfaces on the path), you can invoke a weak mtrace to identify the location in the network where the error has originated. R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
Scenario Output -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 99.99.0.0/16 -4 * * * * ----------------------------------------------------------------- If there is no response for mtrace even after switching to expanded hop search, the command displays an error message. R1>mtrace 99.99.99.99 1.1.1.1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. While traversing the path from source to destination, if the mtrace packet exhausts the maximum buffer size of the packet, then NO SPACE error is displayed in the output.
Scenario Output scenario, a corresponding error message is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/ Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM Wrong interface 6.6.6.0/24 ----------------------------------------------------------------R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
32 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Dell Networking OS Supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a Layer 3 protocol that IPv6 routers use to learn of the multicast receivers that are directly connected to them and the groups in which the receivers are interested. Multicast routing protocols (like PIM) use the information learned from MLD to route multicast traffic to all interested receivers.
Joining a Multicast Group The Querier periodically sends a General Query to the all-nodes multicast address FF02::1. A host that wants to join a multicast group responds to the general query with a report that contains the group address; the report is also addressed to the group (in the IPv6 Destination Address field). To avoid duplicate reporting, any host that hears a report from another host for the same group in which it itself is interested cancels its report for that group.
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +. -+ . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ Version 2 multicast listener reports are sent by IP nodes to report (to neighboring routers) the current multicast listening state, or changes in the multicast listening state, of their interfaces.
| | * Multicast Address * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [1] * | | * * | | +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +-+ . . . . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | . . . Auxiliary Data . . .
ipv6 mld query-interval Reducing Host Response Burstiness General Queries contain a Query Response Interval value, which is the amount of time the host has to respond to a general query. Hosts set a timer to a random number less than the Query Response Interval upon receiving a general query, and send a report when the timer expires. Increasing this value spreads host responses over a greater period of time, and so reduces response burstiness.
ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval Displaying MLD groups table Display MLD groups. Group information can be filtered. To display MLD groups, use the following command: EXEC Privilege show ipv6 mld groups Dell#show ipv6 mld groups Total Number of Groups: 1 MLD Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Ff08::12 Vlan 10 MLDv2 Uptime 00:00:12 Expires 00:02:05 Last Reporter 1::2 Displaying MLD Interfaces Display MLD interfaces.
ipv6 mld snooping enable Disable MLD Snooping When MLD is enabled globally, it is by default enabled on all the VLANs. To disable MLD snooping on a VLAN, use the following command: INTERFACE VLAN Mode no ipv6 mld snooping NOTE: Under the default configuration, there is no need to configure ipv6 mld snooping for any VLAN. Configure the switch as a querier Hosts that do not support unsolicited reporting wait for a general query before sending a membership report.
Enable Snooping Explicit Tracking The switch can be a querier, and therefore also has an option of updating the group table through explicit-tracking. Whether the switch is the querier or not, if snooping is enabled, the switch tracks all the MLD joins. It has a separate explicit tracking table which contains group, source, interface, VLAN, and reporter details.
33 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell EMC Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell EMC Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell EMC Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
Figure 96. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: • UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. • A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
Track IPv4 and IPv6 Routes You can create an object that tracks an IPv4 or IPv6 route entry in the routing table. Specify a tracked route by its IPv4 or IPv6 address and prefix-length. Optionally specify a tracked route by a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance name if the route to be tracked is part of a VRF. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of the tracked object.
Set Tracking Delays You can configure an optional UP and/or DOWN timer for each tracked object to set the time delay before a change in the state of a tracked object is communicated to clients. The configured time delay starts when the state changes from UP to DOWN or the opposite way. If the state of an object changes back to its former UP/DOWN state before the timer expires, the timer is cancelled and the client is not notified.
To configure object tracking on the status of a Layer 2 interface, use the following commands. 1 Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id interface interface line-protocol Valid object IDs are from 1 to 500. 2 (Optional) Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked interface. OBJECT TRACKING mode delay {[up seconds] [down seconds]} Valid delay times are from 0 to 180 seconds. The default is 0.
For an IPv6 interface, a routing object only tracks the UP/DOWN status of the specified IPv6 interface (the track interface ipv6routing command). • The status of an IPv6 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IPv6 address. • The Layer 3 status of an IPv6 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down (for a Layer 3 VLAN, all VLAN ports must be down) or the IPv6 address is removed from the routing table.
Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/11/1 ipv6 routing Description: Austin access point Track an IPv4/IPv6 Route You can create an object that tracks the reachability or metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. You specify the route to be tracked by its address and prefix-length values. Optionally, for an IPv4 route, you can enter a VRF instance name if the route is part of a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) table. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of a tracked IPv4/ IPv6 route.
Tracking Route Reachability Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1 Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} reachability [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 500.
The following example configures object tracking on the reachability of an IPv6 route: DellEMC(conf)#track 105 ipv6 route 1234::/64 reachability DellEMC(conf-track-105)#delay down 5 DellEMC(conf-track-105)#description Headquarters DellEMC(conf-track-105)#end DellEMC#show track 105 Track 105 IPv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Description: Headquarters Reachability is Down (route not in route table) 2 changes, last change 00:03:03 Configuring track reachability refresh interval If there is no entry in ARP tab
2 • OSPF routes - 1 to 1592. The efault is 1. Configure object tracking on the metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} metric threshold [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 500. Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. Valid IPv4 prefix lengths are from /0 to /32. Enter an IPv6 address in X:X:X:X::X format. Valid IPv6 prefix lengths are from /0 to /128.
The following example configures object tracking on the metric threshold of an IPv6 route: DellEMC(conf)#track 8 ipv6 route 2::/64 metric threshold DellEMC(conf-track-8)#threshold metric up 30 DellEMC(conf-track-8)#threshold metric down 40 Displaying Tracked Objects To display the currently configured objects used to track Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces, and IPv4 and IPv6 routes, use the following show commands.
IP Route Resolution ISIS 1 OSPF 1 IPv6 Route Resolution ISIS 1 Example of the show track vrf Command DellEMC#show track vrf red Track 5 IP route 192.168.0.0/24 reachability, Vrf: red Reachability is Up (CONNECTED) 3 changes, last change 00:02:39 First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/4/1 Example of Viewing Object Tracking Configuration DellEMC#show running-config track track 1 ip route 23.0.0.
34 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Areas allow you to further organize your routers within in the AS. One or more areas are required within the AS. Areas are valuable in that they allow sub-networks to "hide" within the AS, thus minimizing the size of the routing tables on all routers. An area within the AS may not see the details of another area’s topology. AS areas are known by their area number or the router’s IP address. Figure 97. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.
• A not-so-stubby area (NSSA) can import AS external route information and send it to the backbone. It cannot receive external AS information from the backbone or other areas. • Totally stubby areas are referred to as no summary areas in the Dell EMC Networking OS. Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important.
Figure 98. OSPF Routing Examples Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone.
An ABR can connect to many areas in an AS, and is considered a member of each area it connects to. Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) The autonomous system border area router (ASBR) connects to more than one AS and exchanges information with the routers in other ASs. Generally, the ASBR connects to a non-interior gate protocol (IGP) such as BGP or uses static routes.
• Type 7: External LSA — Routers in an NSSA do not receive external LSAs from ABRs, but are allowed to send external routing information for redistribution. They use Type 7 LSAs to tell the ABRs about these external routes, which the ABR then translates to Type 5 external LSAs and floods as normal to the rest of the OSPF network. • Type 8: Link LSA (OSPFv3) — This LSA carries the IPv6 address information of the local links.
Figure 99. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS supports up to 128,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 can co-exist but you must configure them individually.
Graceful Restart When a router goes down without a graceful restart, there is a possibility for loss of access to parts of the network due to ongoing network topology changes. Additionally, LSA flooding and reconvergence can cause substantial delays. It is, therefore, desirable that the network maintains a stable topology if it is possible for data flow to continue uninterrupted.
Fast Convergence (OSPFv2, IPv4 Only) Fast convergence allows you to define the speeds at which LSAs are originated and accepted, and reduce OSPFv2 end-to-end convergence time. Dell EMC Networking OS allows you to accept and originate LSAs as soon as they are available to speed up route information propagation. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.
ACKs 2 (shown in bold) is printed only for ACK packets. The following example shows no change in the updated packets (shown in bold). ACKs 2 (shown in bold) is printed only for ACK packets. 00:10:41 : OSPF(1000:00): Rcv. v:2 t:5(LSAck) l:64 Acks 2 rid:2.2.2.2 aid:1500 chk:0xdbee aut:0 auk: keyid:0 from:Vl 1000 LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.1.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.2.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c 00:10:41 : OSPF(1000:00): Rcv. v:2 t:5(LSAck) l:64 Acks 2 rid:2.2.2.
Examples of Setting and Viewing a Dead Interval In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold). DellEMC(conf)#int tengigabitethernet 2/2/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/2/1)#ip ospf hello-interval 20 DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/2/1)#ip ospf dead-interval 80 DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/2/1)# In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold).
• Troubleshooting OSPFv2 1 Configure a physical interface. Assign an IP address, physical or Loopback, to the interface to enable Layer 3 routing. 2 Enable OSPF globally. Assign network area and neighbors. 3 Add interfaces or configure other attributes. 4 Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation.
The OSPF process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process. The router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process. After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF process ID cannot be used again in the system.
• Enable OSPFv2 on an interface and assign a network address range to a specific OSPF area. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF-id mode network ip-address mask area area-id The IP Address Format is A.B.C.D/M. The area ID range is from 0 to 65535 or A.B.C.D/M. Enable OSPFv2 on Interfaces Enable and configure OSPFv2 on each interface (configure for Layer 3 protocol), and not shutdown. You can also assign OSPFv2 to a Loopback interface as a virtual interface.
Designated Router (ID) 13.1.1.1, Interface address 10.2.3.2 Backup Designated Router (ID) 11.1.2.1, Interface address 10.2.3.1 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:05 Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 13.1.1.1 (Designated Router) DellEMC> Loopback interfaces also help the OSPF process.
area area-id stub [no-summary] Use the keywords no-summary to prevent transmission into the area of summary ASBR LSAs. Area ID is the number or IP address assigned when creating the area. Example of the show ip ospf database database-summary Command To view which LSAs are transmitted, use the show ip ospf database process-id database-summary command in EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC#show ip ospf 34 database database-summary OSPF Router with ID (10.1.2.
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 13:39:46 Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0 TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.3.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.100, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.2.100, Interface address 10.1.3.100 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.
DellEMC#(conf)#ex DellEMC##show ip ospf 1 Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 192.168.67.2 Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Convergence Level 0 Min LSA origination 5 secs, Min LSA arrival 1 secs Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 DellEMC# Changing OSPFv2 Parameters on Interfaces In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can modify the OSPF settings on the interfaces.
• – number: the range is from 0 to 255 (the default is 1). Change the retransmission interval between LSAs. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds – seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 5 seconds). • The retransmit interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Change the wait period between link state update packets sent out the interface.
ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds This setting is the amount of time OSPF has available to change its interface authentication type. When you configure the auth-change-wait-time, OSPF sends out only the old authentication scheme until the wait timer expires. After the wait timer expires, OSPF sends only the new authentication scheme.
• Helper-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only as a helper router. • Restart-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only during unplanned restarts. By default, OSPFv2 supports both restarting and helper roles. Selecting one or the other role restricts OSPFv2 to the single selected role. To disable OSPFv2 graceful-restart after you have enabled it, use the no graceful-restart grace-period command in CONFIGROUTEROSPF- id mode.
CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] • Assign a configured prefix list to outgoing OSPF routes. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | isis | rip | static] Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPF process. With the redistribute command, you can include RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the OSPF process.
• Have the OSPF routes been included in the routing table (not just the OSPF database)? Some useful troubleshooting commands are: • show interfaces • show protocols • debug IP OSPF events and/or packets • show neighbors • show routes To help troubleshoot OSPFv2, use the following commands. • View the summary of all OSPF process IDs enables on the router. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config ospf • View the summary information of the IP routes.
router-id 10.10.10.10 DellEMC# Sample Configurations for OSPFv2 The following configurations are examples for enabling OSPFv2. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes. Basic OSPFv2 Router Topology The following illustration is a sample basic OSPFv2 topology.
network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.23.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 30 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 ip address 10.1.13.3/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/2/1 ip address 10.2.13.3/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 2/1/1 and 2/2/1 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.
Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) This section describes the configuration tasks for Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) on the switch. The configuration options of OSPFv3 are the same as those options for OSPFv2, but you may configure OSPFv3 with differently labeled commands. Specify process IDs and areas and include interfaces and addresses in the process. Define areas as stub or totally stubby.
Applying cost for OSPFv3 Change in bandwidth directly affects the cost of OSPF routes. • Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf interface-cost • – interface-cost:The range is from 1 to 65535. Default cost is based on the bandwidth. Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method. The cost of an interface is calculated as Reference Bandwidth/Interface speed.
– process-id: the process ID number assigned. – area-id: the area ID for this interface. Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID Globally To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 globally, use the following commands. • Enable the OSPFv3 process globally and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID} • The range is from 0 to 65535. Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} – number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D.
no ipv6 router ospf process-id vrf {vrf-name} • Reset the OSPFv3 process. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] process Configuring Stub Areas To configure IPv6 stub areas, use the following command. • Configure the area as a stub area. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode area area-id stub [no-summary] – no-summary: use these keywords to prevent transmission in to the area of summary ASBR LSAs. – Area ID: a number or IP address assigned when creating the area.
redistribute {bgp | connected | static} [metric metric-value | metric-type type-value] [routemap map-name] [tag tag-value] Configure the following required and optional parameters: – bgp | connected | static: enter one of the keywords to redistribute those routes. – metric metric-value: The range is from 0 to 4294967295. – metric-type metric-type: enter 1 for OSPFv3 external route type 1 OR 2 for OSPFv3 external route type 2. – route-map map-name: enter a name of a configured route map.
• The valid values are from 40 to 1800 seconds. Configure an OSPFv3 interface to not act on the Grace LSAs that it receives from a restarting OSPFv3 neighbor. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject • Specify the operating mode and type of events that trigger a graceful restart. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode graceful-restart mode [planned-only | unplanned-only] – Planned-only: the OSPFv3 router supports graceful restart only for planned restarts.
The following example shows the show ipv6 ospf database database-summary command. DellEMC#show ipv6 ospf database database-summary ! OSPFv3 Router with ID (200.1.1.
With IPsec-based authentication, Crypto images are used to include the IPsec secure socket application programming interface (API) required for use with OSPFv3. To ensure integrity, data origin authentication, detection and rejection of replays, and confidentiality of the packet, RFC 4302 and RFC 4303 propose using two security protocols — authentication header (AH) and encapsulating security payload (ESP).
NOTE: To encrypt all keys on a router, use the service password-encryption command in Global Configuration mode. However, this command does not provide a high level of network security. To enable key encryption in an IPsec security policy at an interface or area level, specify 7 for [key-encryption-type] when you enter the ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec or ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec command.
The SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same authentication policy (the same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link. • Enable IPsec encryption for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6-based interface.
– spi number: is the SPI value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. – MD5 | SHA1: specifies the authentication type: message digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1). – key-encryption-type: (optional) specifies if the key is encrypted. The valid values are 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). • • – key: specifies the text string used in authentication. All neighboring OSPFv3 routers must share key to exchange information.
show crypto ipsec policy Displaying OSPFv3 IPsec Security Policies To display the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies, use the following commands. • Display the AH and ESP parameters configured in IPsec security policies, including the SPI number, key, and algorithms used. EXEC Privilege mode show crypto ipsec policy [name name] • – name: displays configuration details about a specified policy.
Outbound ESP Auth Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba8ed8bb5efe91e97eb7c0c30808825fb5 Inbound ESP Cipher Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a Outbound ESP Cipher Key : bbdd96e6eb4828e2e27bc3f9ff541e43faa759c9ef5706ba10345a1039ba8f8a Transform set : esp-128-aes esp-sha1-hmac The following example shows the show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 command.
• Did you configure the interfaces for Layer 3 correctly? • Is the router in the correct area type? • Did you include the routes in the OSPF database? • Did you include the OSPF routes in the routing table (not just the OSPF database)? Some useful troubleshooting commands are: • show ipv6 interfaces • show ipv6 protocols • debug ipv6 ospf events and/or packets • show ipv6 neighbors • show ipv6 routes Viewing Summary Information To get general route, configuration, links status, and debug i
MIB Object OID Description ospfv3AsLsdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.3.1 Contains OSPFv3 process’s AS-scope link state database. The LSDB contains the ASscope link state advertisements. ospfv3AreaLsdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.4.1 Contains OSPFv3 process’s Area-scope link state database. The LSDB contains the Areas-scope link state advertisements. ospfv3LinkLsdbEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.5.1 Contains OSPFv3 process’s Link-scope LSDB for non-virtual interfaces. ospfv3IfEntry 1.3.6.1.2.1.191.1.7.
35 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table. However, in some cases, there may be a need to forward the packet based on other criteria: size, source, protocol type, destination, and so on.
• Destination port • TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: • Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. • If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
• Apply a Redirect-list to an Interface using a Redirect-group PBR Exceptions (Permit) To create an exception to a redirect list, use thepermit command. Exceptions are used when a forwarding decision should be based on the routing table rather than a routing policy. The Dell EMC Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries.
• number is the number in sequence to initiate this rule • ip-address is the Forwarding router’s address • tunnel is used to configure the tunnel settings • tunnel-id is used to redirect the traffic • track is used to track the object-id • track is to enable the tracking • FORMAT: A.B.C.
You can apply multiple rules to a single redirect-list. The rules are applied in ascending order, starting with the rule that has the lowest sequence number in a redirect-list displays the correct method for applying multiple rules to one list. Example: Creating Multiple Rules for a Redirect-List DellEMC(conf)#ip redirect-list test DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#seq 10 redirect 10.1.1.2 ip 20.1.1.0/24 any DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#seq 15 redirect 10.1.1.3 ip 20.1.1.
Example: Applying a Redirect-list to an Interface DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ip redirect-group xyz Example: Applying a Redirect-list to an Interface DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ip redirect-group DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ip redirect-group DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 no ip address ip redirect-group test ip redirect-group xyz shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ip redirect-group DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ip redirect-group test xyz test xy
[up], Next-hop reachable (via Po 7) [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/18/1) [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/19/1) , Track 200 , Track 200 , Track 200 Use the show ip redirect-list (without the list name) to display all the redirect-lists configured on the device. DellEMC#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list rcl0: Defined as: seq 5 permit ip 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.200 199.199.199.199 199.199.199.199 seq 10 redirect 1.1.1.2 tcp 234.224.234.234 255.234.234.234 222.222.222.
Create the Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/23/1)#ip redirect-list GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#direct 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)# seq 15 permit ip any any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list GOLD description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.
View Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list GOLD: Defined as: seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23/1), ARP resolved seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.
seq 15 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.144, Track 3 [up], Nexthop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 20 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp any host 144.144.144.144, Track 3 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 25 redirect 43.1.1.2 track 4 ip host 7.7.7.7 host 144.144.144.
Apply the Redirect Rule to an Interface: DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/28 DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/28)#ip redirect-group explicit_tunnel DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/28)#exit DellEMC(conf)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: DellEMC#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
36 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop. Implementation Information The following information is necessary for implementing PIM-SM.
Refuse Multicast Traffic A host requesting to leave a multicast group sends an IGMP Leave message to the last-hop DR. If the host is the only remaining receiver for that group on the subnet, the last-hop DR is responsible for sending a PIM Prune message up the RPT to prune its branch to the RP. 1 After receiving an IGMP Leave message, the gateway removes the interface on which it is received from the outgoing interface list of the (*,G) entry.
CONFIGURATION mode {ip | ipv6} multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. • Configuring S,G Expiry Timers • Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point • Configuring a Designated Router • Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1 Enable IPv4 or IPv6 multicast routing on the system.
To display PIM neighbors for each interface, use the show {ip | ipv6} pim neighbor [detail] command EXEC Privilege mode. Following is an example of show ip pim neighbor command output: DellEMC#show Neighbor Address 127.87.5.5 127.87.3.5 127.87.50.
FortyGigE 1/11/1 FortyGigE 1/12/1 FortyGigE 1/13/1 Configuring S,G Expiry Timers You can configure a global expiry time (for all [S,G] entries). By default, [S,G] entries expire in 210 seconds. When you create, delete, or update an expiry time, the changes are applied when the keep alive timer refreshes. To configure a global expiry time, use the following command. Enable global expiry timer for S, G entries.
no shutdown DellEMC#show running-configuration pim ! ipv6 pim rp-address 2111:dddd:0eee::22/64 group-address 2111:dddd:0eee::22/128 Overriding Bootstrap Router Updates PIM-SM routers must know the address of the RP for each group for which they have (*,G) entry. This address is obtained automatically through the bootstrap router (BSR) mechanism or a static RP configuration. Use the following command if you have configured a static RP for a group.
router with the greatest priority value is the DR. If the priority value is the same for two routers, then the router with the greatest IPv4 or IPv6 address is the DR. By default, the DR priority value is 192, so the IP address determines the DR. • Assign a DR priority value. INTERFACE mode {ip | ipv6} pim dr-priority priority-value • Change the interval at which a router sends hello messages. INTERFACE mode {ip | ipv6} pim query-interval seconds • Display the current value of these parameter.
Mode Count Intvl Prio Fo 1/3/1 v2/S 1 30 1 Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:140f DR : this router Fo 1/11/1 v2/S 0 30 1 Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:1417 DR : this router Dell# Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains A PIM domain is a contiguous set of routers that all implement PIM and are configured to operate within a common boundary defined by PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs). PMBRs connect each PIM domain to the rest of the Internet.
ipv6 pim bsr-candidate 2 Enter the following IPv4 or IPv6 command to make a PIM router a RP candidate: CONFIGURATION ip pim rp-candidate ipv6 pim rp-candidate 3 Display IPv4 or IPv6 Bootstrap Router information. EXEC Privilege show ip pim bsr-router Example: DellEMC# show ip pim bsr-router PIMv2 Bootstrap information This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2) BSR address: 7.7.7.
37 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
2 Enable PIM-SSM for a range of addresses. Related Configuration Tasks • Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1 Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2 Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created.
Configuring PIM-SSM with IGMPv2 R1(conf)#do show run pim ! ip pim rp-address 10.11.12.2 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 ip pim ssm-range ssm R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list standard map seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 ! ip access-list standard ssm seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires 239.0.0.
Some routers within the domain are configured to be C-RPs. Other routers are configured to be Bootstrap Router candidates (C-BSRs); one router is elected the BSR for the domain and the BSR is responsible for forwarding BSM containing RP-set information to other routers. The RP election process is as follows: 1 C-BSRs flood their candidacy throughout the domain in a BSM. Each message contains a BSR priority value, and the C-BSR with the highest priority value becomes the BSR.
BSR address: 200::1 (?) BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 126 Expires: 00:01:43 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 100::1, priority: 0, hash mask length: 126 Next Cand_RP_advertisement in 00:00:25 RP: 100::1(Lo 0) DellEMC# Enabling RP to Server Specific Multicast Groups When you configure an RP candidate, its advertisement is sent to the entire multicast address range and the group-to-RP mapping is advertised for the entire range of multicast address.
38 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
• Single MD can be monitored on max. of 4 MG ports. Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on both physical and logical interfaces, such as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. The source port (MD) with monitored traffic and the destination ports (MG) to which an analyzer can be attached must be on the same switch. You can configure up to 128 source ports in a monitoring session. Only one destination port is supported in a monitoring session.
destination TeGig 1/6/2 direction tx, if the MD port TenGig 1/6/1 is an untagged member of any VLAN, all monitored frames that the MG port TeGig 1/6/2 receives are tagged with the VLAN ID of the MD port. Similarly, if BPDUs are transmitted, the MG port receives them tagged with the VLAN ID 4095. This behavior might result in a difference between the number of egress packets on the MD port and monitored packets on the MG port.
DellEMC(conf)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Gre-Protocol FcMonitor ------ ------------------ -------------- --------0 Te 1/1/1 Te 1/2/1 rx Port A N/A No 0 Po 10 Te 1/2/1 rx Port A N/A No 1 Vl 40 Te 1/3/1 rx Flow A N/A No Source IP Dest IP DSCP TTL Drop Rate --------- -------- ---- --- ---- ---- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ NOTE: Source as VLAN is achieved via Flow based mirroring.
EXEC Privilege mode show run monitor session DellEMC#show run monitor session ! monitor multicast-queue 7 DellEMC# Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 3 ingress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ip access-group testflow in DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 ip address 10.11.1.254/24 ip access-group testflow in shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#exit DellEMC(conf)#do show ip accounting access-list testflow ! Extended Ingress IP access list testflow on TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 Total cam count 4 seq 5 permit icmp any any 40 monitor 40 count bytes (0 packets 0 bytes) seq 10 permit ip 102.
Figure 102. Remote Port Mirroring Configuring Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
• The L3 interface configuration should be blocked for RPM VLAN. • The member port of the reserved VLAN should have MTU and IPMTU value as MAX+4 (to hold the VLAN tag parameter). • To associate with source session, the reserved VLAN can have at max of only 4 member ports. • To associate with destination session, the reserved VLAN can have multiple member ports.
• A destination port cannot be used in any spanning tree instance. • The reserved VLAN used to transport mirrored traffic must be a L2 VLAN. L3 VLANs are not supported. • On a source switch on which you configure source ports for remote port mirroring, you can add only one port to the dedicated RPM VLAN which is used to transport mirrored traffic. You can configure multiple ports for the dedicated RPM VLAN on intermediate and destination switches.
Configuring a RSPAN VLAN for RPM Following are the steps for configuring a RSPAN VLAN for RPM. You must repeat the below mentioned steps on source, intermediate, and destination switches. 1 Enter global configuration mode. EXEC mode configure terminal 2 Create a VLAN to transport mirrored traffic in RPM. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 3 Configure the RSPAN VLAN to be used to transport mirrored traffic in RPM.
Configuring a destination session Following are the steps for configuring a destination session on a switch. You can configure the below steps on other destination switches to configure additional destination ports for this RPM session. 1 Configure the destination session for RPM. CONFIGURATION mode monitor session session-id 2 Associate the Layer 2 VLAN used to transport monitored traffic with this destination session.
• 8 is tengigabitethernet 1/8/1 Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on a source switch The below configuration example shows that the source is a source port and the destination is the reserved VLAN (for example, remotevlan 10).
DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-2)#flow-based enable DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-2)#exit DellEMC(conf)#mac access-list standard mac_acl DellEMC(config-std-macl)#permit 00:00:00:00:11:22 count monitor DellEMC(config-std-macl)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 100 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#mac access-group mac_acl1 in DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#exit DellEMC(conf)# Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on an intermediate switch Following is a sample configuration of RPM on an intermediate switch.
Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on an intermediate switch Following is a sample configuration of RPM on an intermediate switch. DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 30 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#mode remote-port-mirroring DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged tengigabitethernet 1/4/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged tengigabitethernet 1/5/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#exit Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on a Destination switch Following is a sample configuration of RPM on a destination switch.
To configure an ERPM session: Table 71. Configuration steps for ERPM Step Command Purpose 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode. 2 monitor session type erpm Specify a session ID and ERPM as the type of monitoring session, and enter the Monitoring-Session configuration mode. The session number needs to be unique and not already defined. 3 source { interface | range } direction {rx | tx | both} Specify the source port or range of ports.
tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1-1/1/3 mac access-group flow in <<<<<<<<<<<<<< Only ingress packets are supported for mirroring shutdown ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. Figure 104.
– The Header that gets attached to the packet is 38 bytes long. In case of a packet with L3 VLAN, it would be 42 bytes long. The original payload /original mirrored data starts from the 39th byte in a given ERPM packet. The first 38/42 bytes of the header needs to be ignored/ chopped off. – Some tools support options to edit the capture file. We can make use of such features (for example: editcap ) and chop the ERPM header part and save it to a new trace file. This new file (i.e.
VLT Non-fail over Scenario Consider a scenario where port monitoring is configured to mirror traffic on a VLT device's port or LAG to a destination port on some other device (TOR) on the network. When there is no fail over to the VLT peer, the VLTi link (ICL LAG) also receives the mirrored traffic as the VLTi link is added as an implicit member of the RPM vlan. As a result, the mirrored traffic also reaches the peer VLT device effecting VLTi link's bandwidth usage.
Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution Mirroring using Intermediate VLT device — No restrictions apply In this scenario, the VLT device acts as the intermediate device in remote mirroring. The TOR switch contains the source-RPM configurations that enable mirroring of the VLT lag (of the TOR switch) to any orphan port in the VLT device. The packet analyzer is connected through the VLT device, but not directly to the VLT device. None.
39 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
Table 73. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking OS Supports Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information • The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. • The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.
PROTOCOL PVST mode no disable Disabling PVST+ To disable PVST+ globally or on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable PVST+ globally. PROTOCOL PVST mode disable • Disable PVST+ on an interface, or remove a PVST+ parameter configuration. INTERFACE mode no spanning-tree pvst Example of Viewing PVST+ Configuration To display your PVST+ configuration, use the show config command from PROTOCOL PVST mode.
Figure 106. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Te 1/32/1 Port 375 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/22/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.375 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. • Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
The values for interface PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states.
Figure 107. PVST+ with Extend System ID • Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id Example of Viewing the Extend System ID in a PVST+ Configuration DellEMC(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32/1 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/12/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/32/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/12,32/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip a
protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 300 bridge-priority 4096 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) 739
40 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 75.
Feature Direction Create Policy Maps Ingress + Egress Create Input Policy Maps Ingress Honor DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 108.
• Policy-Based QoS Configurations • Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment • Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing • Queue Classification Requirements for PFC Functionality • Support for marking dot1p value in L3 Input Qos Policy • Weighted Random Early Detection • Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space • Specifying Policy-Based Rate Shaping in Packets Per Second • Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping • Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED • Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes • Guidelines for Co
dot1p Queue Number 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 • Change the priority of incoming traffic on the interface. dot1p-priority Example of Configuring a dot1p Priority on an Interface DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#switchport DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#dot1p-priority 1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#end Honoring dot1p Priorities on Ingress Traffic By default, Dell EMC Networking OS does not honor dot1p priorities on ingress traffic.
Configuring Port-Based Rate Policing If the interface is a member of a VLAN, you may specify the VLAN for which ingress packets are policed. • Rate policing ingress traffic on an interface. INTERFACE mode rate police Example of the rate police Command The following example shows configuring rate policing.
Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 109. Constructing Policy-Based QoS Configurations Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell EMC Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them.
Use step 1 or step 2 to start creating a Layer 3 class map. 1 Create a match-any class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-any 2 Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3 Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode [seq sequence number] match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} After you create a class-map, Dell EMC Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five ACLs. Match-all class-maps allow only one ACL.
Creating a Layer 2 Class Map All class maps are Layer 3 by default; however, you can create a Layer 2 class map by specifying the layer2 option with the class-map command. A Layer 2 class map differentiates traffic according to 802.1p value and/or VLAN and/or characteristics defined in a MAC ACL.. Use Step 1 or Step 2 to start creating a Layer 2 class map. 1 Create a match-any class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-any 2 Create a match-all class map.
Displaying Configured Class Maps and Match Criteria To display all class-maps or a specific class map, use the following command. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: An explicit “deny any" rule in a Layer 3 ACL used in a (match any or match all) class-map creates a "default to Queue 0" entry in the CAM, which causes unintended traffic classification. In the following example, traffic is classified in two Queues, 1 and 2. Class-map ClassAF1 is “match any,” and ClassAF2 is “match all”.
20419 1 24511 1 10 0 0 0 0x0 0x0 0 0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 14 0.0.0.0/0 - 1 0 DellEMC#show cam layer3-qos interface twe 1/5 Cam Port Dscp Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp DSCP Queue Index Flag Port Port Marking ------------------------------------------------------------------------20416 1 18 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.5/32 0.0.0.0/0 20 2 20417 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.2/32 0.0.0.0/0 10 1 20418 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.3/32 0.0.0.0/0 12 1 20419 1 10 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.
Output QoS policies regulate egress traffic. The regulation mechanisms for output QoS policies are bandwidth percentage, scheduler strict, rate shaping and WRED. NOTE: When changing a "service-queue" configuration in a QoS policy map, all QoS rules are deleted and re-added automatically to ensure that the order of the rules is maintained. As a result, the Matched Packets value shown in the show qos statistics command is reset.
CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-output 2 After you configure an output QoS policy, do one or more of the following: Scheduler Strict — Policy-based Strict-priority Queueing configuration is done through scheduler strict. It is applied to Qos-policyoutput. When scheduler strict is applied to multiple Queues, high queue number takes precedence. Allocating Bandwidth to Queue Specifying WRED Drop Precedence Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping To configure policy-based rate shaping, use the following command.
• Specify a WRED profile to yellow and/or green traffic. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode wred For more information, refer to Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic. DSCP Color Maps This section describes how to configure color maps and how to display the color map and color map configuration.
Example: Create a DSCP Color Map The following example creates a DSCP color map profile, color-awareness policy, and applies it to interface 1/11. Create the DSCP color map profile, bat-enclave-map, with a yellow drop precedence , and set the DSCP values to 9,10,11,13,15,16 DellEMC(conf)# qos dscp-color-map bat-enclave-map DellEMC(conf-dscp-color-map)# dscp yellow 9,10,11,13,15,16 DellEMC(conf-dscp-color-map)# exit Assign the color map, bat-enclave-map to the interface.
Display summary information about a color policy for a specific interface. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy summary tengigabitethernet 1/10/1 Interface dscp-color-map TE 1/10/1 mapONE Display detailed information about a color policy for a specific interface DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy detail tengigabitethernet 1/10/1 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10/1 Dscp-color-map mapONE yellow 4,7 red 20,30 Create Policy Maps There are two types of policy maps: input and output.
Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Dell EMC Networking OS provides the ability to honor DSCP values on ingress packets using Trust DSCP feature. The following table lists the standard DSCP definitions and indicates to which queues Dell EMC Networking OS maps DSCP values. When you configure trust DSCP, the matched packets and matched bytes counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics. Table 78.
trust dot1p Mapping dot1p Values to Service Queues All traffic is by default mapped to the same queue, Queue 0. If you honor dot1p on ingress, you can create service classes based the queueing strategy in Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets. You may apply this queuing strategy globally by entering the following command from CONFIGURATION mode. • All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable service-class dynamic dot1p on an interface or globally.
Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface 3 Apply the policy map to an interface. Applying an Output QoS Policy to a Queue To apply an output QoS policy to a queue, use the following command. • Apply an output QoS policy to queues. INTERFACE mode service-queue Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy To specify an aggregate QoS policy, use the following command. • Specify an aggregate QoS policy.
qos-rate-adjust overhead-bytes For example, to include the Preamble and SFD, type qos-rate-adjust 8. For variable length overhead fields, know the number of bytes you want to include. The default is disabled. Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing In strict-priority queuing, the system de-queues all packets from the assigned queue before servicing any other queues. You can assign strict-priority to one unicast queue, using the strict-priority command.
Currently if the ingress is untagged and egress is tagged, then dot1p priority 0(default) will be added as part of the tag header and from the next hop PFC will be based on that dot1p priority. Support is added to mark the dot1p value in the L3 Input Qos Policy in this feature. Hence it is possible to mark both DSCP and Dot1p simultaneously in the L3 Input Qos Policy.
Figure 110. Packet Drop Rate for WRED You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles. Creating WRED Profiles To create WRED profiles, use the following commands. 1 Create a WRED profile. CONFIGURATION mode wred-profile 2 Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values. WRED mode threshold Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic Dell EMC Networking OS should apply the profile.
Displaying Default and Configured WRED Profiles To display the default and configured WRED profiles, use the following command. • Display default and configured WRED profiles and their threshold values. EXEC mode show qos wred-profile Displaying WRED Drop Statistics To display WRED drop statistics, use the following command. • Display the number of packets Dell EMC Networking OS the WRED profile drops.
19 MCAST DellEMC# 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space Before Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.3.1, there was no way to measure the number of CAM entries a policy-map would consume (the number of CAM entries that a rule uses is not predictable; from 1 to 16 entries might be used per rule depending upon its complexity). Therefore, it was possible to apply to an interface a policy-map that requires more entries than are available.
Specifying Policy-Based Rate Shaping in Packets Per Second You can configure the rate shaping in packets per second (pps) for QoS output policies. You can configure rate shaping in pps for a QoS output policy, apart from specifying the rate shaping value in bytes. You can also configure the peak rate and the committed rate for packets in kilobits per second (Kbps) or pps. Committed rate refers to the guaranteed bandwidth for traffic entering or leaving the interface under normal network conditions.
4 Alternatively, configure the committed rate and committed burst size in bytes. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode DellEMC(config-qos-policy-out)# rate shape Kbps peak-rate burst-KB committed Kbps committedrate burst-KB Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED The WRED congestion avoidance functionality drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed. Traffic is a mixture of various kinds of packets. The rate at which some types of packets arrive might be greater than others.
• When WRED is configured on the global service-pool (regardless of whether ECN on global service-pool is configured), and one or more queues are enabled with both WRED and ECN, ECN marking takes effect. The packets are ECN marked up to shared- buffer limits as determined by the shared-ratio for that global service-pool. WRED/ECN configurations for the queues that belong to backplane ports are common to all the backplane ports and cannot be specified separately for each backplane port granularity.
DellEMC(conf-wred) #threshold min 100 max 200 max-drop-rate 40 3 Configure another WRED profile, and specify the threshold and maximum drop rate. WRED mode DellEMC(conf-wred) #wred—profile thresh-2 DellEMC(conf-wred) #threshold min 300 max 400 max-drop-rate 80 4 Create a global buffer pool that is a shared buffer pool accessed by multiple queues when the minimum guaranteed buffers for the queue are consumed.
Sample configuration to mark non-ecn packets as “yellow” with Multiple traffic class Consider the example where there are no different traffic classes that is all the packets are egressing on the default ‘queue0’. Dell EMC Networking OS can be configured as below to mark the non-ecn packets as yellow packets.
1 Rate Policing 2 Queuing 3 Marking For the L3 Routed packets, the DSCP marking is the only marking action supported in the software. As a part of this feature, the additional marking action to set the “color” of the traffic will be provided. Until Release 9.3(0.0), the software has the capability to qualify only on the 6-bit DSCP part of the ToS field in IPv4 Header. You can now accept and process incoming packets based on the 2-bit ECN part of the ToS field in addition to the DSCP categorization.
This marking-action can be configured for all of the below L3 match sequence types: • • • • match ip access-group match ip dscp match ip precedence match ip vlan Sample configuration to mark non-ecn packets as “yellow” with single traffic class Consider the use case where the packet with DSCP value “40” need to be enqueued in queue#2 and packets with DSCP value as 50 need to be enqueued in queue#3. And all the packets with ecn value as ‘0’ must be marked as ‘yellow’.
seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40_ecn ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_50_ecn ! policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-map class_dscp_50 Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface To process Layer 3 packets that contain a dot1p (IEEE 802.
based triggers are supported, which are the values derived from the show command output in the Max Use count mode. In Dell EMC Networking OS Release 9.3(0.0), only the Max Use count mode of operation is supported for the computation of maximum counter values. Depending on the buffer space statistical values that you can obtain, you can modify the settings for buffer area to achieve enhanced reliability and efficiency in the handling of packets.
--------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 9 (interface Fo 1/152) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 13 (interface Fo 1/156) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 17 (interface Fo 1/160) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS ------------------------
UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Quality of Service (QoS) 773
41 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
Implementation Information Dell EMC Networking OS supports both versions of RIP and allows you to configure one version globally and the other version on interfaces or both versions on the interfaces. The following table lists the defaults for RIP in Dell EMC Networking OS. Table 81.
Enabling RIP Globally By default, RIP is not enabled in Dell EMC Networking OS. To enable RIP globally, use the following commands. 1 Enter ROUTER RIP mode and enable the RIP process on Dell EMC Networking OS. CONFIGURATION mode router rip 2 Assign an IP network address as a RIP network to exchange routing information.
192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/4 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary DellEMC#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 978 160.160.0.0/16 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 160.160.0.0/16 auto-summary 2.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 2.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 4.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 4.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 8.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 8.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 12.0.0.
neighbor ip-address • You can use this command multiple times to exchange RIP information with as many RIP networks as you want. Disable a specific interface from sending or receiving RIP routing information. ROUTER RIP mode passive-interface interface Assigning a Prefix List to RIP Routes Another method of controlling RIP (or any routing protocol) routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. A prefix list is applied to incoming or outgoing routes.
– map-name: the name of a configured route map. To view the current RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Setting the Send and Receive Version To change the RIP version globally or on an interface in Dell EMC Networking OS, use the following command. To specify the RIP version, use the version command in ROUTER RIP mode.
To configure an interface to receive or send both versions of RIP, include 1 and 2 in the command syntax. The command syntax for sending both RIPv1 and RIPv2 and receiving only RIPv2 is shown in the following example. DellEMC(conf-if)#ip rip send version 1 2 DellEMC(conf-if)#ip rip receive version 2 The following example of the show ip protocols command confirms that both versions are sent out that interface.
The autosummary command requires no other configuration commands. To disable automatic route summarization, enter no autosummary in ROUTER RIP mode. NOTE: If you enable the ip split-horizon command on an interface, the system does not advertise the summarized address. Controlling Route Metrics As a distance-vector protocol, RIP uses hop counts to determine the best route, but sometimes the shortest hop count is a route over the lowest-speed link.
Example of the debug ip rip Command The following example shows the confirmation when you enable the debug function. DellEMC#debug ip rip RIP protocol debug is ON DellEMC# To disable RIP, use the no debug ip rip command. RIP Configuration Example The examples in this section show the command sequence to configure RIPv2 on the two routers shown in the following illustration — Core 2 and Core 3. The host prompts used in the following example reflect those names.
Core 2 RIP Output The examples in the section show the core 2 RIP output. Examples of the show ip Commands to View Core 2 Information • To display Core 2 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. • To display Core 2 RIP setup, use the show ip route command. • To display Core 2 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command. The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 2.
Output delay 8 milliseconds between packets Automatic network summarization is in effect Outgoing filter for all interfaces is Incoming filter for all interfaces is Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send TenGigabitEthernet 2/4/1 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 2/5/1 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 2/3/1 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 2/11/1 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10.300.10.0 10.200.10.0 10.11.20.0 10.11.10.
10.11.30.0/24 10.0.0.0/8 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.2.0/24 Core3# directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 3/11/1 auto-summary directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 3/23/1 auto-summary directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 3/24/1 auto-summary The following command shows the show ip routes command to view the RIP setup on Core 3.
RIP Configuration Summary Examples of Viewing RIP Configuration on Core 2 and Core 3 The following example shows viewing the RIP configuration on Core 2. ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.11.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.11.20.2/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.200.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.250.10.1/24 no shutdown router rip version 2 10.200.10.0 10.300.10.0 10.11.10.0 10.11.20.
42 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell EMC Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
Setting the RMON Alarm To set an alarm on any MIB object, use the rmon alarm or rmon hc-alarm command in GLOBAL CONFIGURATION mode. • Set an alarm on any MIB object.
CONFIGURATION mode [no] rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [owner string] – number: assigned event number, which is identical to the eventIndex in the eventTable in the RMON MIB. The value must be an integer from 1 to 65,535 and be unique in the RMON Event Table. – log: (Optional) generates an RMON log entry when the event is triggered and sets the eventType in the RMON MIB to log or logand-trap. Default is no log.
[no] rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner ownername] [buckets bucket-number] [interval seconds] – controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. – integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON group of statistics. The value must be a unique index in the RMON History Table. – owner: (Optional) specifies the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. The default is a null-terminated string.
43 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanningtree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.
• Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. • All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology. • Adding a group of ports to a range of VLANs sends multiple messages to the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) task, avoid using the range command. When using the range command, Dell EMC Networking recommends limiting the range to five ports and 40 VLANs.
no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default. When you enable RSTP, all physical and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the RST topology. • Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. • Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports.
Figure 112. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. DellEMC#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.379, designated path cost 0 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU : sent 121, received 5 The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 380 (TenGigabitEthernet 2/4/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.380 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
The following table displays the default values for RSTP. Table 83.
Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps, use the following command. • Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively. snmp-server enable traps xstp Modifying Interface Parameters On interfaces in Layer 2 mode, you can set the port cost and port priority values. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The previous table lists the default values. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port.
• Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the primary or secondary root. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode bridge-priority priority-value – priority-value The range is from 0 to 65535. The lower the number assigned, the more likely this bridge becomes the root bridge. The default is 32768. Entries must be multiples of 4096. Example of the bridge-priority Command A console message appears when a new root bridge has been assigned.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 no ip address switchport spanning-tree rstp edge-port shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-2/1/1)# Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Use RSTP fast hellos to achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster. The standard RSTP link-state detection mechanism does not offer the same low link-state detection speed. To achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster, use RSTP fast hellos.
44 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell EMC Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
45 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell EMC Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
Enabling AAA Accounting The aaa accounting command allows you to create a record for any or all of the accounting functions monitored. To enable AAA accounting, use the following command. • Enable AAA accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function.
System accounting can use only the default method list. Example of Configuring AAA Accounting to Track EXEC and EXEC Privilege Level Command Use In the following sample configuration, AAA accounting is set to track all usage of EXEC commands and commands on privilege level 15.
NAS receives the accounting request from the supplicant and sends the RADIUS request packet to the accounting server after successful authentication. The RADIUS Accounting request contains a RADIUS Acct-Status-Type as Start or Stop to update the supplicant session to the accounting server. NOTE: In RADIUS accounting, fallback behavior among RADIUS and TACACS servers is not supported as the RADIUS accounting feature is not available in Dell EMC Networking OS version earlier than 9.14.1.5.
Tmp-String-9 = "ai:" Acct-Unique-Session-Id = "2d6c5beef615d18fa21bbde29411f6d5" Timestamp = 1557508935 MAB START record: Fri May 10 23:30:21 2019 User-Name = "001122334455" Called-Station-Id = "00-11-33-44-77-88" Calling-Station-Id = "00-11-22-33-44-55" NAS-IP-Address = 10.16.133.
RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 40 Acct-Status-Type START 44 Acct-Session-Id CLI Session-Id - To match start and stop session requests. 61 NAS-Port-Type ASYNC - for console session. Accounting Attributes VIRTUAL - for telnet/SSH session. Table 85. RADIUS Accounting Stop Record Attributes for CLI user RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS.
RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS. Session Identification Attributes 1 User-Name User name/ Supplicant MAC Address (for MAB). 5 NAS-Port Port on which session is terminated. 6 Service-Type Framed (2) for EAP /Call check (10) for MAB. 8 Framed-IP-Address IPv4 address of supplicant. 168 Framed-IPV6-Address IPv6 address of supplicant. 30 Called-Station-Id Switch MAC Address. 31 Calling-Station-Id Supplicant MAC Address.
RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 61 NAS-Port-Type Ethernet NOTE: During the administrative initiated reload and system failover events, the accounting Stop records for the 802.1x authorized supplicants are not sent to RADIUS server. Table 89. Use cases for dot1x supplicant to trigger RADIUS Accounting Start/Stop records dot1x event Accounting type Attributes Dot1x user authentication success Start Start record attributes for dot1x supplicant.
AAA Authentication Dell EMC Networking OS supports a distributed client/server system implemented through authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) to help secure networks against unauthorized access.
2 • enable: use the password you defined using the enable secret, enable password, or enable sha256-password command in CONFIGURATION mode. In general, the enable secret command overrules the enable password command. If you configure the enable sha256-password command, it overrules both the enable secret and enable password commands. • line: use the password you defined using the password command in LINE mode. • local: use the username/password database defined in the local configuration.
3 Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host x.x.x.x key some-password Examples of the enable commands for RADIUS To get enable authentication from the RADIUS server and use TACACS as a backup, issue the following commands. The following example shows enabling authentication from the RADIUS server. DellEMC(config)# aaa authentication enable default radius tacacs Radius and TACACS server has to be properly setup for this. DellEMC(config)# radius-server host x.x.x.
Example: DellEMC(config)#aaa authentication login vty_auth_list radius Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? 3 You are prompted to force the users to re-authenticate whenever there is a change in the RADIUS server list.. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host IP Address Example: DellEMC(config)#radius-server host 192.100.0.12 Force all logged-in users to re-authenticate (y/n)? DellEMC(config)#no radius-server host 192.100.0.
Privilege Levels Overview Limiting access to the system is one method of protecting the system and your network. However, at times, you might need to allow others access to the router and you can limit that access to a subset of commands. In Dell EMC Networking OS, you can configure a privilege level for users who need limited access to the system. Every command in Dell EMC Networking OS is assigned a privilege level of 0, 1, or 15. You can configure up to 16 privilege levels in Dell EMC Networking OS.
username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password] [privilege level][secret] Configure the optional and required parameters: – name: Enter a text string up to 63 characters long. – access-class access-list-name: Enter the name of a configured IP ACL. – nopassword: Do not require the user to enter a password. – encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. – password: Enter a string. – privilege level The range is from 0 to 15.
CONFIGURATION mode username name [access-class access-list-name] [privilege level] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password Secret] Configure the optional and required parameters: 2 • name: Enter a text string up to 63 characters(maximum) long. • access-class access-list-name: Restrict access by access-class.. • privilege level: The range is from 0 to 15. • nopassword: No password is required for the user to log in. • encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text.
DellEMC(conf)#privilege config level 8 snmp-server DellEMC(conf)#end DellEMC#show running-config Current Configuration ... ! hostname Force10 ! enable password level 8 notjohn enable password Force10 ! username admin password 0 admin username john password 0 john privilege 8 ! The following example shows the Telnet session for user john. The show privilege command output confirms that john is in privilege level 8. In EXEC Privilege mode, john can access only the commands listed.
Configure the following optional and required parameters: – encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. – password: Enter a text string up to 32 characters long. To view the password configured for a terminal, use the show config command in LINE mode. Enabling and Disabling Privilege Levels To enable and disable privilege levels, use the following commands. • Set a user’s security level.
• ACL Configuration Information • Auto-Command • Privilege Levels After gaining authorization for the first time, you may configure these attributes. NOTE: RADIUS authentication/authorization is done for every login. There is no difference between first-time login and subsequent logins. Idle Time Every session line has its own idle-time. If the idle-time value is not changed, the default value of 30 minutes is used. RADIUS specifies idle-time allow for a user during a session before timeout.
Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS, you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods. The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS.
login authentication {method-list-name | default} • This procedure is mandatory if you are not using default lists. To use the method list. CONFIGURATION mode authorization exec methodlist Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the UDP port, the key password, the number of retries, and the timeout. To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command.
CONFIGURATION mode radius-server key [encryption-type] key – encryption-type: enter 7 to encrypt the password. Enter 0 to keep the password as plain text. • – key: enter a string. The key can be up to 42 characters long. You cannot use spaces in the key. Configure the number of times Dell EMC Networking OS retransmits RADIUS requests. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server retransmit retries • – retries: the range is from 0 to 100. Default is 3 retries.
CONFIGURATION mode aaa radius auth-method mschapv2 3 Establish a host address and password. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host H key K 4 Log in to switch using console or telnet or ssh with a valid user role. When 1-factor authentication is used, the authentication succeeds enabling you to access the switch. When two-factor authentication is used, the system prompts you to enter a one-time password as a second step of authentication.
Attributes In Disconnect messsage requests and CoA-Request packets, certain attributes are used to uniquely identify the NAS as well as user sessions on the NAS. The combination of NAS and session identification attributes included in a CoA-request or a disconnect-message request must match at least one session in order for a request to be successful; otherwise, a disconnect-Nak or CoA-Nak is sent.
Attribute code Attribute Description • v=6027 (Force10);Vendor-Type=1(Force10-av-pair) Length = value Table 94. DM Attributes Attribute code Attribute Description 1 User-Name(Mandatory) Name of the user associated with one or more sessions. Mandatory attributes The following tables describe the mandatory attributes for various message types: Table 95.
Table 97. CoA EAP/MAB Bounce Port Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory NAS Identification Attributes 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. No 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS. No Port on which session is terminated Yes t=26(vendor-specific);l=length;vendor-identificationattribute;Length=value; Data=”cmd=bounce-host-port” Yes Session Identification Attributes 5 NAS-Port Authorization Attributes 26 Vendor-Specific Table 98.
Error-cause Values It is possible that a Dynamic Authorization Server cannot honor Disconnect Message request or CoA request packets for some reason. The Error-Cause Attribute provides more detail on the cause of the problem. It may be included within CoA-Nak and Disconnect-Nak packets. The following table describes various error causes for the CoA and DM requests: Table 100.
NOTE: The Invalid Attribute Value Error-Cause is applicable to following scenarios: – if the CoA request contains incorrect Vendor-Specific attribute value. – if the CoA request contains incorrect NAS-port or calling-station-id values. • rejects the CoA-Request containing NAS-IP-Address or NAS-IPV6-Address attribute that does not match the NAS with a CoA-Nak; Error-Cause value is “NAS Identification Mismatch” (403).
Disconnect Message Processing This section lists various actions that the NAS performs during DM processing. The following activities are performed by NAS: • responds with DM-Nak, if no matching session is found in NAS for the session identification attributes in DM; Error-Cause value is “Session Context Not Found” (503). • responds with DM-Nak for any internal processing error in NAS; Error-Cause value is “Resources Unavailable” (506).
client-key encryption-type key Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)client-key 7 password Disconnecting administrative users logged in through RADIUS Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to configure disconnect messages (DMs) to disconnect RADIUS administrative users who are logged in through an AAA interface. Before disconnecting an administrative user using the disconnect messages, ensure that the following prerequisites are satisfied: • Shared key is configured in NAS for DAC.
NAS disables the authentication port that is hosting the session and re-enables it after 10 seconds. All user sessions connected to this authentication port are affected. Dell(conf#)radius dynamic-auth Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)coa-bounce-port NAS takes the following actions whenever port-bounce is triggered: • validates the CoA request and the session identification attributes. • sends a CoA-Nak with an error-cause of 402 (missing attribute), if the CoA request does not contain the NAS-port attributes.
• sends-ACK if user is configured with forced-authorization. Terminating the 802.1x user session Dell EMC Networking OS provides RADIUS extension commands that terminate the 802.1x user session. When this request is initiated, the NAS disconnects the 802.1x user session without disabling the physical port that authenticated the current session. Before terminating the 802.1x user session, ensure that the following prerequisites are satisfied: • Shared key is configured in NAS for DAC.
NAS administratively shuts down the 802.1x enabled port that is hosting the session. You can re-enable this port only through a nonRADIUS mechanism or through bounce-port request. Dell(conf#)radius dynamic-auth Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)coa-disable-port NAS takes the following actions: • validates the CoA request and the session identification attributes. • sends a CoA-Nak with an error-cause of 402 (missing attribute), if the CoA request does not contain the NAS-port attribute.
NAS considers the new replay protection window value from next window period. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes. The default is 5 minutes. Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)replay-prot-window 10 Rate-limiting RADIUS packets NAS enables you to allow or reject RADIUS dynamic authorization packets based on the rate-limiting value that you specify. NAS lets you to configure number of RADIUS dynamic authorization packets allowed per minute. The default value is 30 packets per minute.
To select TACACS+ as the login authentication method, use the following commands. 1 Configure a TACACS+ server host. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host {ip-address | host} Enter the IP address or host name of the TACACS+ server. Use this command multiple times to configure multiple TACACS+ server hosts. 2 Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of the method list you wish to use with the TACAS+ authentication method.
authentication success on vty0 ( 10.11.9.209 ) %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user admin on line vty0 (10.11.9.209) DellEMC(conf)#username angeline password angeline DellEMC(conf)#%RPM0-P:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user angeline on vty0 (10.11.9.209) %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-3-AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_SUCCESS: Enable password authentication success on vty0 ( 10.11.9.209 ) Monitoring TACACS+ To view information on TACACS+ transactions, use the following command.
– key key: enter a string for the key. The key can be up to 42 characters long. This key must match a key configured on the TACACS+ server host. This parameter must be the last parameter you configure. If you do not configure these optional parameters, the default global values are applied. Example of Connecting with a TACACS+ Server Host To specify multiple TACACS+ server hosts, configure the tacacs-server host command multiple times.
To use the SSH client, use the following command. • Open an SSH connection and specify the hostname, username, port number,encryption cipher,HMAC algorithm and version of the SSH client. EXEC Privilege mode ssh {hostname} [-l username | -p port-number | -v 2}| -c encryption cipher | -m HMAC algorithm • • hostname is the IP address or host name of the remote device. Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). SSH V2 is enabled by default on all the modes.
copy scp: flash: Example of Using SCP to Copy from an SSH Server on Another Switch The following example shows the use of SCP and SSH to copy a software image from one switch running SSH server on UDP port 99 to the local switch. Other SSH related command include: • crypto key generate : generate keys for the SSH server. • debug ip ssh : enables collecting SSH debug information. • ip scp topdir : identify a location for files used in secure copy transfer.
• rekey-limit: volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. The range is from 1 to 4096 to megabytes. The default is 1024 megabytes. Examples The following example configures the time-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 30 minutes. DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh rekey time 30 The following example configures the volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 4096 megabytes.
• hmac-sha2-256 The default HMAC algorithms are the following: • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96. Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list.
[no] ip ssh server dns enable To disable the DNS in the SSH server configuration, use the no version of this command. Example of DNS Configuration in SSH Server Connections To view the status of DNS in the SSH server configuration, use the show running-config ip ssh command from EXEC mode.
no ip ssh password-authentication enable 4 Enable RSA authentication in SSH. CONFIGURATION Mode ip ssh rsa-authentication enable 5 Install user’s public key for RSA authentication in SSH. EXEC Privilege Mode ip ssh rsa-authentication username username my-authorized-keys flash://public_key If you provide the username, the Dell EMC Networking OS installs the public key for that specific user. In case, no user is associated with the current logged-in session, the system displays the following error message.
Examples of Creating shosts and rhosts The following example shows creating shosts. admin@Unix_client# cd /etc/ssh admin@Unix_client# ls moduli sshd_config ssh_host_dsa_key.pub ssh_host_key.pub ssh_host_rsa_key.pub ssh_config ssh_host_dsa_key ssh_host_key ssh_host_rsa_key admin@Unix_client# cat ssh_host_rsa_key.
If the IP address in the RSA key does not match the IP address from which you attempt to log in, the following message appears. In this case, verify that the name and IP address of the client is contained in the file /etc/hosts: RSA Authentication Error. Telnet To use Telnet with SSH, first enable SSH, as previously described. By default, the Telnet daemon is enabled. If you want to disable the Telnet daemon, use the following command, or disable Telnet in the startup config.
access class. After users identify themselves, retrieves the access class from the local database and applies it. ( then can close the connection if a user is denied access.) NOTE: If a VTY user logs in with RADIUS authentication, the privilege level is applied from the RADIUS server only if you configure RADIUS authentication. The following example shows how to allow or deny a Telnet connection to a user. Users see a login prompt even if they cannot log in. No access class is configured for the VTY line.
DellEMC(config-line-vty)#access-class sourcemac DellEMC(config-line-vty)#end Role-Based Access Control With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role. Users are granted permissions based on their user roles, not on their individual user ID. User roles are created for job functions and through those roles they acquire the permissions to perform their associated job function.
NOTE: When you enter a user role, you have already been authenticated and authorized. You do not need to enter an enable password because you will be automatically placed in EXEC Priv mode. For greater security, the ability to view event, audit, and security system log is associated with user roles. For information about these topics, see Audit and Security Logs.
exec-timeout 0 0 line vty 0 login authentication test authorization exec test line vty 1 login authentication test authorization exec test To enable role-based only AAA authorization, enter the following command in Configuration mode: DellEMC(conf)#aaa authorization role-only System-Defined RBAC User Roles By default, the Dell EMC Networking OS provides 4 system defined user roles. You can create up to 8 additional user roles. NOTE: You cannot delete any system defined roles.
Creating a New User Role Instead of using the system defined user roles, you can create a new user role that best matches your organization. When you create a new user role, you can first inherit permissions from one of the system defined roles. Otherwise you would have to create a user role’s command permissions from scratch. You then restrict commands or add commands to that role NOTE: You can change user role permissions on system pre-defined user roles or user-defined user roles.
Modifying Command Permissions for Roles You can modify (add or delete) command permissions for newly created user roles and system defined roles using the role mode { { { addrole | deleterole } role-name } | reset } command command in Configuration mode. NOTE: You cannot modify system administrator command permissions. If you add or delete command permissions using the role command, those changes only apply to the specific user role. They do not apply to other roles that have inheritance from that role.
DellEMC(conf)#show role mode configure interface Role access: netadmin, secadmin, sysadmin Example: Verify that the Security Administrator Can Access Interface Mode The following example shows that the secadmin role can now access Interface mode (highlighted in bold).
The following example deletes a user role. NOTE: If you already have a user ID that exists with a privilege level, you can add the user role to username that has a privilege DellEMC(conf)# no username john The following example adds a user, to the secadmin user role. DellEMC(conf)# username john role secadmin password 0 password AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles This section describes how to configure AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles.
To configure AAA authorization, use the aaa authorization exec command in CONFIGURATION mode. The aaa authorization exec command determines which CLI mode the user will start in for their session; for example, Exec mode or Exec Privilege mode. For information about how to configure authentication for roles, see Configure AAA Authentication for Roles.
line vty 9 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin ucraaa ! Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC For RBAC and privilege levels, the Dell EMC Networking OS RADIUS and TACACS+ implementation supports two vendor-specific options: privilege level and roles. The Dell EMC Networking vendor-ID is 6027 and the supported option has attribute of type string, which is titled “Force10-avpair”.
Configuring AAA Accounting for Roles To configure AAA accounting for roles, use the aaa accounting command in CONFIGURATION mode. aaa accounting {system | exec | commands {level | role role-name}} {name | default} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} Example of Configuring AAA Accounting for Roles The following example shows you how to configure AAA accounting to monitor commands executed by the users who have a secadmin user role.
netadmin secadmin sysadmin testadmin netadmin Exec Exec Exec Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Config Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Displaying Role Permissions Assigned to a Command To display permissions assigned to a command, use the show role command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays the user role and or permission level.
• If the credentials are invalid, the authentication fails. NOTE: 2FA does not support RADIUS authentications done with REST, Web UI, and OMI. Handling Access-Challenge Message To provide a two-step verification in addition to the username and password, NAS prompts for additional information. An Access-Challenge request is sent from the RADIUS server to NAS.
This module requires NAS for handling the access challenge from the RADIUS server. NAS sends the input OTP in an Access-Request to the RADIUS server, and the user authentication succeeds or fails depending upon the Access-Accept or Access-Reject response received at NAS from the RADIUS server. Configuring the System to Drop Certain ICMP Reply Messages You can configure the Dell EMC Networking OS to drop ICMP reply messages.
Table 103.
Important Points to Remember • The OS image verification feature is disabled by default on the Dell EMC Networking OS. • The OS image verification feature is supported for images stored in the local system only. • The OS image verification feature is not supported when the fastboot or the warmboot features are enabled on the system. • If OS image verification fails after a reload, the system does not load the startup configuration.
Startup Configuration Verification Dell EMC Networking OS comes with startup configuration verification feature. When enabled, it checks the integrity of the startup configuration that the system uses while the system reboots and loads only if it is intact. Important Points to Remember • The startup configuration verification feature is disabled by default on the Dell EMC Networking OS. • The feature is supported for startup configuration files stored in the local system only.
After enabling and configuring startup configuration verification, the device verifies the hash checksum of the startup configuration during every reload. DellEMC# verified boot hash startup—config 619A8C1B7A2BC9692A221E2151B9DA9E Configuring the root User Password For added security, you can change the root user password. If you configure the secure-cli command on the system, the Dell EMC Networking OS resets any previously-configured root access password without displaying any warning message.
– 7 directs the system to store the password with a dynamic salt. When you configure the root access password, ensure that your password meets the following criteria: – A minimum of eight characters in length – A minimum of one lower case letter (a to z) – A minimum of one upper case letter (A to Z) – A minimum of one numeric character (0 to 9) – A minimum of one special character including a space (" !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~") If you enable the boot access password, the system prompts for a passwor
46 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell EMC Networking OS. VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. It enables service providers to use 802.
Figure 113. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. • Dell EMC Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
3 Enabling VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN. Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag • Configuring Dell EMC Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports • Debugging VLAN Stacking • VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. • Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN.
Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN To enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN, use the following command. • Enable VLAN-Stacking for the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible Example of Viewing VLAN Stack Member Status To display the status and members of a VLAN, use the show vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Members of a VLAN-Stackingenabled VLAN are marked with an M in column Q.
[tagged | untagged] Example of Configuring a Trunk Port as a Hybrid Port and Adding it to Stacked VLANs In the following example, TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 is a trunk port that is configured as a hybrid port and then added to VLAN 100 as untagged VLAN 101 as tagged, and VLAN 103, which is a stacking VLAN.
VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks The first field in the VLAN tag is the tag protocol identifier (TPID), which is 2 bytes. In a VLAN-stacking network, after the frame is double tagged, the outer tag TPID must match the TPID of the next-hop system. While 802.1Q requires that the inner tag TPID is 0x8100, it does not require a specific value for the outer tag TPID.
Figure 114.
Figure 115.
Figure 116. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet-drop precedence is supported on the switch. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
Table 104. Drop Eligibility Behavior Ingress Egress DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Normal Port Normal Port Retain CFI Set CFI to 0. Trunk Port Trunk Port Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI. Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 Access Port Trunk Port To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. • Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
Marking Egress Packets with a DEI Value On egress, you can set the DEI value according to a different mapping than ingress. For ingress information, refer to Honoring the Incoming DEI Value. To mark egress packets, use the following command. • Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet.
NOTE: The ability to map incoming C-Tag dot1p to any S-Tag dot1p requires installing up to eight entries in the Layer 2 QoS and Layer 2 ACL table for each configured customer VLAN. The scalability of this feature is limited by the impact of the 1:8 expansion in these content addressable memory (CAM) tables.
• vman-qos-dual-fp: mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the S-Tag dot1p. This method requires twice as many CAM entries as vman-qos and FP blocks in multiples of 2. The default is: 0 FP blocks for vman-qos and vman-qos-dual-fp. 2 The new CAM configuration is stored in NVRAM and takes effect only after a save and reload. EXEC Privilege mode copy running-config startup-config 3 Reload the system. reload 4 Map C-Tag dot1p values to a S-Tag dot1p value.
Figure 118. VLAN Stacking without L2PT You might need to transport control traffic transparently through the intermediate network to the other region. Layer 2 protocol tunneling enables BPDUs to traverse the intermediate network by identifying frames with the Bridge Group Address, rewriting the destination MAC to a user-configured non-reserved address, and forwarding the frames.
Figure 119. VLAN Stacking with L2PT Implementation Information • L2PT is available for STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ BPDUs. • No protocol packets are tunneled when you enable VLAN stacking. • L2PT requires the default CAM profile. Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1 Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT.
show cam-profile 2 Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3 Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode protocol-tunnel stp Specifying a Destination MAC Address for BPDUs By default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses a Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address for tunneling BPDUs. You can configure another value. To specify a destination MAC address for BPDUs, use the following command.
Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To debug Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. • Display debugging information for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode debug protocol-tunnel Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.1Q architecture to offer separate VLANs to customers with no coordination between customers, and minimal coordination between customers and the provider. 802.
47 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
hardware sampling rate is backed-off from 512 to 1024. Note that port 1 maintains its sampling rate of 16384; port 1 is unaffected because it maintains its configured sampling rate of 16384.: • If the interface states are up and the sampling rate is not configured on the port, the default sampling rate is calculated based on the line speed. • If the interface states are shut down, the sampling rate is set using the global sampling rate.
Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global default extended maximum header size: 128 bytes Global extended information enabled: switch 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.1, Agent IP addr: 1.1.1.
Example of the show sflow command when the sflow max-header-size extended is configured globally DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/10/1)#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 86400 Global default extended maximum header size: 256 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.12, Agent IP addr: 100.1.1.
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Global) The first bold line indicates sFlow is globally enabled. The second bold lines indicate sFlow is enabled on Te 1/16/1 and Te 1/17/1 DellEMC#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Line Card) DellEMC#show sflow Stack-unit 1 1 Samples rcvd from h/w Total UDP packets exported UDP packets exported via RPM UDP packets dropped :0 :0 :0 :36 Configuring Specify Collectors The sflow collector command allows identification of sFlow collectors to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. You can specify up to two sFlow collectors. If you specify two collectors, the samples are sent to both. • Identify sFlow collectors to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded.
sFlow on LAG ports When a physical port becomes a member of a LAG, it inherits the sFlow configuration from the LAG port. Enabling Extended sFlow Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depend on the type of sampled packet. The platform supports extended-switch information processing only. Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depending on the type of sampled packet. You can enable the following options: • extended-switch — 802.1Q VLAN ID and 802.
Important Points to Remember • To export extended-gateway data, BGP must learn the IP destination address. • If the IP destination address is not learned via BGP the Dell EMC Networking system does not export extended-gateway data. • If the IP source address is learned via IGP, srcAS and srcPeerAS are zero. • The srcAS and srcPeerAS might be zero even though the IP source address is learned via BGP.
48 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell EMC Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
• Troubleshooting SNMP Operation • Transceiver Monitoring • Configuring SNMP context name Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements. A datum of management information is called a managed object; the value of a managed object can be static or variable. Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base (MIB).
To enable security for SNMP packets transferred between the server and the client, you can use the snmp-server user username group groupname 3 auth authentication-type auth-password priv aes128 priv-password command to specify that AES-CFB 128 encryption algorithm needs to be used.
Important Points to Remember • Typically, 5-second timeout and 3-second retry values on an SNMP server are sufficient for both LAN and WAN applications. If you experience a timeout with these values, increase the timeout value to greater than 3 seconds, and increase the retry value to greater than 2 seconds on your SNMP server. • User ACLs override group ACLs. Set up SNMP As previously stated, Dell EMC Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 and version 2 that are community-based security models.
• auth — password privileges. Select this option to set up a user with password authentication. • priv — password and privacy privileges. Select this option to set up a user with password and privacy privileges. To set up user-based security (SNMPv3), use the following commands. • Configure the user with view privileges only (no password or privacy privileges).
Enable SNMPv3 traps You must configure notify option for the SNMPv3 traps to work. • Configure an SNMPv3 traps. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server group group-name {oid-tree} priv read name write name notify name Enter the keyword notify then a name (a string of up to 20 characters long) as the notify view name. • Configure an SNMPv3 view for notify.
Writing Managed Object Values You may only alter (write) a managed object value if your management station is a member of the same community as the SNMP agent, and the object is writable. Use the following command to write or write-over the value of a managed object. • To write or write-over the value of a managed object. snmpset -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.instance}syntax value Example of Writing the Value of a Managed Object > snmpset -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.
The default is None. Subscribing to Managed Object Value Updates using SNMP By default, the Dell EMC Networking system displays some unsolicited SNMP messages (traps) upon certain events and conditions. You can also configure the system to send the traps to a management station. Traps cannot be saved on the system. Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following three sets of traps: • • • RFC 1157-defined traps — coldStart, warmStart, linkDown, linkUp, authenticationFailure, and egpNeighbborLoss.
• Enable a subset of SNMP traps. snmp-server enable traps NOTE: The envmon option enables all environment traps including those traps that are enabled with the envmon supply, envmon temperature, and envmon fan options. NOTE: You must configure notify option for the SNMPv3 traps to work.
xstp %SPANMGR-5-STP_NEW_ROOT: New Spanning Tree Root, Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.fc35. %SPANMGR-5-STP_TOPOLOGY_CHANGE: Bridge port TenGigabitEthernet 1/8/1 transitioned from Forwarding to Blocking state. %SPANMGR-5-MSTP_NEW_ROOT_BRIDGE: Elected root bridge for instance 0. %SPANMGR-5-MSTP_NEW_ROOT_PORT: MSTP root changed to port Te 1/8/1 for instance 0. My Bridge ID: 40960:0001.e801.fc35 Old Root: 40960:0001.e801.fc35 New Root: 32768:00d0.038a.2c01.
MEM_THRESHOLD: Memory %s usage above threshold. MemUsage (%d) MEM_THRESHOLD_CLR: Memory %s usage drops below threshold. MemUsage (%d) DETECT_STN_MOVE: Station Move threshold exceeded for Mac %s in vlan %d CAM-UTILIZATION: Enable SNMP envmon CAM utilization traps.
Trap SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (1489568) 4:08:15.68,SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.47.2.0.1, SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.
"REACHABLE: Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is reachable"SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.0 = INTEGER: 2 Following is the sample audit log message that other syslog servers that are reachable receive: Oct 21 05:26:04: dv-fedgov-s4810-6: %EVL-6-REACHABLE:Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is reachable Copy Configuration Files Using SNMP To do the following, use SNMP from a remote client.
MIB Object OID Object Values Description • copyDestFileLocation .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.6 1 = flash 2 = slot0 3 = tftp If copyDestFileType is a binary, you must specify copyDestFileLocation and copyDestFileName. Specifies the location of destination file. • 4 = ftp If copyDestFileLocation is FTP or SCP, you must specify copyServerAddress, copyUserName, and copyUserPassword. 5 = scp copyDestFileName .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.
• index must be unique to all previously executed snmpset commands. If an index value has been used previously, a message like the following appears. In this case, increment the index value and enter the command again. Error in packet. Reason: notWritable (that object does not support modification) Failed object: FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.101 • To complete the command, use as many MIB objects in the command as required by the MIB object descriptions shown in the previous table.
snmpset -c private -v 2c force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 3 copyDestFileType.index i 2 Examples of Copying Configuration Files from a UNIX Machine The following example shows how to copy configuration files from a UNIX machine using the object name. > snmpset -c public -v 2c -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.11.131.162 copySrcFileType.7 i 3 copyDestFileType.7 i 2 FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.7 = INTEGER: runningConfig(3) FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyDestFileType.
copyDestFileName.4 s /home/myfilename copyServerAddress.4 a 11.11.11.11 Copy a Binary File to the Startup-Configuration To copy a binary file from the server to the startup-configuration on the Dell EMC Networking system via FTP, use the following command. • Copy a binary file from the server to the startup-configuration on the Dell EMC Networking system via FTP. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 1 copySrcFileLocation.
MIB Object OID Values Description copy. The state is set to active when the copy is completed. Obtaining a Value for MIB Objects To obtain a value for any of the MIB objects, use the following command. • Get a copy-config MIB object value. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address [OID.index | mibobject.index] index: the index value used in the snmpset command used to complete the copy operation. NOTE: You can use the entire OID rather than the object name.
Viewing the Reason for Last System Reboot Using SNMP • To view the reason for last system reboot using SNMP, you can use any one of the applicable SNMP commands: The following example shows a sample output of the snmpwalk command to view the last reset reason. [DellEMC ~]$ snmpwalk -c public -v 2c 10.16.133.172 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.3.1.7 DELL-NETWORKING-CHASSIS-MIB::dellNetProcessorResetReason.stack.1.1 = STRING: Reboot by Software DELL-NETWORKING-CHASSIS-MIB::dellNetProcessorResetReason.stack.2.
MIB Support to Display the Available Memory Size on Flash Dell EMC Networking provides more MIB objects to display the available memory size on flash memory. The following table lists the MIB object that contains the available memory size on flash memory. Table 112. MIB Objects for Displaying the Available Memory Size on Flash via SNMP MIB Object OID Description chStackUnitFlashUsageUtil 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.9.1.6 Contains flash memory usage in percentage.
MIB Object OID Description chSysCoresProcess 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5 Contains information that includes the process names that generated each core file. Viewing the Software Core Files Generated by the System • To view the software core files generated by the system, use the following command. snmpwalk -v2c -c public 192.168.60.120 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.1 = 1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.2 = 2 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.4.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.5.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.6.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.7.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.8.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.9.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.10.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.11.
Viewing the Available Partitions on Flash • • To view the available partitions on flash using SNMP, use the following command: snmpwalk -v 2c -c public -On 10.16.150.97 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.1 = STRING: "tmpfs" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.2 = STRING: "/dev/wd0i" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.3 = STRING: "mfs:477" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.4 = STRING: "/dev/wd0e" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.3.1 = INTEGER: 40960 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.3.
MIB Support to Display Egress Queue Statistics Dell EMC Networking OS provides MIB objects to display the information of the packets transmitted or dropped per unicast or multicast egress queue. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 116. MIB Objects to display egress queue statistics MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpEgrQTxPacketsRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.20.1.6 Rate of Packets transmitted per Unicast/ Multicast Egress queue. dellNetFpEgrQTxBytesRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.
INTEGER: 1275078656 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.30.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 2097157 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.2.32.1.4.70.70.70.2.1.4.70.70.70.2 = INTEGER: 2097157 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.1.32.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = STRING: "Po 20" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.0.24.0.0.0.0 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.
MIB Support for entAliasMappingTable Dell EMC Networking provides a method to map the physical interface to its corresponding ifindex value. The entAliasMappingTable table contains zero or more rows, representing the logical entity mapping and physical component to external MIB identifiers. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 118. MIB Objects for entAliasMappingTable MIB Object OID Description entAliasMappingTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.
MIB Object OID dot3adAgg 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1 dot3adAggTable 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1 Contains information about every Aggregator that is associated with a system. dot3adAggEntry 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1 Contains a list of Aggregator parameters and indexed by the ifIndex of the Aggregator. dot3adAggMACAddress 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 Contains a six octet read–only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator. dot3adAggActorSystemPriority 1.2.840.10006.
MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggPortListPorts 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.2.1.1 Contains a complete set of ports currently associated with the Aggregator. Viewing the LAG MIB • To view the LAG MIB generated by the system, use the following command. snmpbulkget -v 2c -c LagMIB 10.16.148.157 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356736 iso.2.
iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.3161605.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.4209668.6 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.4210181.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.9437185.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.7.0.2113029.2 = STRING: "fortyGigE 1/50" iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.7.0.3161092.6 = STRING: "TenGigabitEthernEt 0/39" iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.7.0.3161605.2 = STRING: "fortyGigE 1/49" iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.7.0.4209668.6 = STRING: "TenGigabitEthernEt 0/40" iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.
Viewing the Details of Organizational Specific Unrecognized LLDP TLVs • To view the information of organizational specific unrecognized LLDP TLVs using SNMP, use the following commands. snmpwalk -v2c -c public 10.16.150.83 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.1.133 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.2.134 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.3.135 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.4.136 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.5.
MIB Support for LLDP Notification Interval Dell EMC Networking provides objects for controlling the transmission of LLDP notification messages. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 122. MIB Objects for LLDP Notification Interval MIB Object OID Description lldpNotificationInterval 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.5 This object controls the transmission of LLDP notifications. SNMP Walk Output snmpwalk -c public -v 2c 10.16.132.55 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.5 .1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.1.5.
MIB support for interface level port security The MIB table dellNetPortSecIfConfigTable is used to achieve port security feature (MAC address learning limit) on an interface. NOTE: Port Security is not supported in VLT port channels. The following table shows the MIB objects of the table dellNetPortSecIfConfigTable. The OID of the MIB table is 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1. Table 124.
To configure dellNetPortSecIfSecureMacLimit as 100 on an interface whose ifIndex is 2101252, use the following command. snmpset –v 2c –c public 10.16.129.26 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.3. 2101252 i 100 To remove dellNetPortSecIfSecureMacLimit configuration on an interface whose ifIndex is 2101252, use the following command. snmpset –v 2c –c public 10.16.129.26 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.3.
MIB objects for configuring MAC addresses This section describes about the MIB table dellNetPortSecSecureMacAddrTable that contains the MAC database of the system. The table is indexed by the following parameters: • MAC Address (Octet string of length 6 and MAC address ( in decimal) as value • VLAN ID Table 126. MIB Objects for configuring MAC addresses MIB Object OID Access or Permission Description dellNetSecureMacIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.3.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.
Fetch Dynamic MAC Entries using SNMP Dell EMC Networking supports the RFC 1493 dot1d table for the default VLAN and the dot1q table for all other VLANs. NOTE: The 802.1q Q-BRIDGE MIB defines VLANs regarding 802.1d, as 802.1d itself does not define them. As a switchport must belong a VLAN (the default VLAN or a configured VLAN), all MAC address learned on a switchport are associated with a VLAN. For this reason, the Q-Bridge MIB is used for MAC address query.
Example of Fetching MAC Addresses Learned on a Port-Channel Using SNMP Use dot3aCurAggFdbTable to fetch the learned MAC address of a port-channel. The instance number is the decimal conversion of the MAC address concatenated with the port-channel number.
particular VRF instance without having to be mapped to a community map. SNMPv2c context has to be mapped to a community map. A new CLI command, snmp context, under BGP context, has been introduced to perform this function. To map the context to a VRF instance for SNMPv2c, follow these steps: 1 2 Create a community and map a VRF to it. Create a context and map the context and community, to a community map.
• router bgp 100 • address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 • snmp context context1 • neighbor 20.1.1.1 remote-as 200 • neighbor 20.1.1.1 no shutdown • exit-address-family • address-family ipv4 vrf vrf2 • snmp context context2 • timers bgp 30 90 • neighbor 30.1.1.1 remote-as 200 • neighbor 30.1.1.1 no shutdown • exit-address-family Example of SNMP Walk Output for BGP timer configured for vrf1 (SNMPv2c) snmpwalk -v 2c -c vrf1 10.16.131.125 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20.1.2.3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.
dot3aCommonAggFdbIndex SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.6.1.1.1107755009.1 dot3aCommonAggFdbVlanId SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.6.1.2.1107755009.1 dot3aCommonAggFdbTagConfig SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.6.1.3.1107755009.1 dot3aCommonAggFdbStatus SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.6.1.4.1107755009.
Transceiver Monitoring To retrieve and display the transceiver related parameters you can perform a snmpwalk transceiver table OID to retrieve transceiver details as per the MIB. This enables transceiver monitoring and identification of potential issues related to the transceivers on a switch. • Ensure that SNMP is enabled on the device before running a query to retrieve the transceiver information.
Field (OID) Description SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.16 Temperature SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.17 Volltage SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.18 Transmit Bias Current Lane1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.19 Transmit Bias Current Lane2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.20 Transmit Bias Current Lane3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.
49 Stacking Using the Dell EMC Networking OS stacking feature, you can interconnect multiple switch units with stacking ports or front end user ports. The stack becomes manageable as a single switch through the stack management unit. The system accepts Unit ID numbers from 1 to 6 and it supports stacking up to six units.
• • Switch insertion Switch removal If the master switch goes off line, the standby replaces it as the new master and the switch with the next highest priority or MAC address becomes standby. Stack Master Election The stack elects a master and standby unit at bootup time based on two criteria. • • Unit priority — User-configurable. The range is from 1 to 14. A higher value (14) means a higher priority. The default is 0.
-- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 0 up up 7021 up 7072 2 1 up up 7072 up 7021 2 2 up up 7021 up 7021 5 0 up up 7072 up 7021 5 1 up up 7021 up 6971 5 2 up up 7072 up 7021 Speed in RPM DellEMC# Virtual IP You can manage the stack using a single IP, known as a virtual IP, that is retained in the stack even after a failover.
1 Member not present 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present 6 Member not present [output omitted] Standalone#show system | grep priority Master priority : 0 -----------STACK BEFORE CONNECTION---------------Stack#show system brief Stack MAC : 00:01:e8:d5:f9:6f -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version --------------------------------------------------0 Standby online 1 Management online 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present
Figure 120. Supported Stacking Topologies High Availability on Stacks Stacks have master and standby management units analogous to Dell EMC Networking route processor modules (RPM). The master unit synchronizes the running configuration and protocol states so that the system fails over in the event of a hardware or software fault on the master unit. In such an event, or when the master unit is removed, the standby unit becomes the stack manager and Dell EMC Networking OS elects a new standby unit.
copy delete dir disable enable exit format fsck pwd rename reset show ssh-peer-stack-unit start telnet-peer-stack-unit terminal upload Dell(standby)# Copy from one file to another Delete a file List files on a filesystem Turn off privileged commands Turn on privileged commands Exit from the EXEC Format a filesystem Filesystem check utility Display current working directory Rename a file Reset selected card Show running system information Open a SSH connection to the peer stack-unit Start shell Open a telne
• Ports are divided into 32 stack-groups (0 to 31) as shown in the following example. – stack-group 0 to 31 corresponds to 32 40 gig ports Figure 121. Stack-Group Assignments You can connect the units while they are powered down or up. Stacking ports are bidirectional. When a unit is added to a stack, the management unit performs a system check on the new unit to ensure the hardware type is compatible. A similar check is performed on the Dell EMC Networking OS version.
The range is from 0 to 31. 2 Save the stacking configuration on the ports. EXEC Privilege mode write memory 3 Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload Dell EMC Networking OS automatically assigns a number to the new unit and adds it as member switch in the stack. The new unit synchronizes its running and startup configurations with the stack. 4 After the units are reloaded, the system reboots. The units come up in a stack after the reboot completes.
Example of a Syslog Figure 122. Creating a new stack In the above example, stack unit 1 is the master management unit, stack unit 2 is the standby unit. The cables are connected to each unit.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Member Management Standby Member Member Member not present online online online online not present S4810 S4810 S4810 S4810 S4810 S4810 S4810 S4810 4810-8-3-12-1447 4810-8-3-12-1447 4810-8-3-12-1447 4810-8-3-12-1447 64 64 64 64 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus -------------------------------------1 1 absent absent 1 2 up AC up 2 1 down UNKNOWN down 2 2 up AC up 3 1 absent absent 3 2 up AC up 4 1 absent absent 4 2 up AC up -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1
stack-unit stack-unit-number renumber stack-unit-new-number 3 (OPTIONAL) On the new unit, assign a management priority based on whether you want the new unit to be the stack manager. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unit stack-unit-number priority priority-number 4 Assign a stack group to each unit. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unitstack-unit-number stack-group stack-group-number 5 Connect the new unit to the stack using stacking cables.
7 Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload Dell EMC Networking OS automatically assigns a number to the new unit and adds it as member switch in the stack. The new unit synchronizes its running and startup configurations with the stack. 8 If a standalone switch already has stack groups configured. Attach cables to connect the ports already configured as stack groups on the switch to one or more switches in the stack.
• • • • • • Creating a Virtual Stack Unit in a Stack Displaying Information About a Stack Influencing Management Unit Selection on a Stack Managing Redundancy on a Stack Resetting a Unit on a Stack Recover from Stack Link Flaps Assigning Unit Numbers to Units in an Stack Each unit in the stack has a stack number that is either assigned by you or Dell EMC Networking OS. Units are numbered from 1 to 6. Stack numbers are stored in NVRAM and are preserved upon reload. • Assign a stack-number to a unit.
Examples of the show system Commands Display information about a switch stack using the show system command. The following is an example of the show system command to view the stack details.
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 up up up up up up up up up up 15919 16049 16049 16181 16181 up up up up up 16248 16521 16384 16452 22215 Speed in RPM The following example shows the show system stack-ports command.
• Prevent the stack master from rebooting after a failover. CONFIGURATION mode redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit • This command does not affect a forced failover, manual reset, or a stack-link disconnect. Display redundancy information. EXEC Privilege mode show redundancy Resetting a Unit on a Stack You may reset any stack unit except for the master management unit, as shown in the following message. % Error: Reset of master unit is not allowed.
Remove Units or Front End Ports from a Stack To remove units or front end ports from a stack, use the following instructions. • Removing a Unit from a Stack • Removing Front End Port Stacking Removing a Unit from a Stack The running-configuration and startup-configuration are synchronized on all stack units. A stack member that is disconnected from the stack maintains this configuration. To remove a stack member from the stack, disconnect the stacking cables from the unit.
reload After the units are reloaded, the system reboots. The units come up as standalone units after the reboot completes. Troubleshoot a Stack To troubleshoot a stack, use the following recovery tasks. • Recover from Stack Link Flaps • Recover from a Card Problem State on a Stack Recover from Stack Link Flaps Stack link integrity monitoring enables units to monitor their own stack ports and disable any stack port that flaps five times within 10 seconds.
50 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell EMC Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. To view the storm control broadcast configuration show storm-control broadcast | multicast | unknown-unicast | pfc-llfc[interface] command.
• • If you configure storm control from both INTERFACE and CONFIGURATION mode, the INTERFACE mode configurations override the CONFIGURATION mode configurations. The storm control is calculated in packets per second. • Configure storm control. • INTERFACE mode Configure the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only).
• Once PFC storm is detected on an interface, you can use the storm-control pfc in queue-drop command on the interface to drop the ingress packets. This command triggers a queue drop state on the interface with PFC storm, so that the traffic through other ports and priorities are not affected. For more information about the above commands, see the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Te 0/0 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/1 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 Te 0/2 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/3 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/4 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/5 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/80 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 DellEMC# 954 Storm Control
51 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS.
Configure Spanning Tree Configuring spanning tree is a two-step process.
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 123. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1 If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2 Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3 Enable the interface.
Example of the show config Command To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default.
no disable Examples of Verifying Spanning Tree Information To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group To add a Layer 2 interface to the spanning tree topology, use the following command. • Enable spanning tree on a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree 0 Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP.
The range is from 1 to 10. • the default is 2 seconds. Change the max-age parameter (the refresh interval for configuration information that is generated by recomputing the spanning tree topology). PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally.
CAUTION: Enable PortFast only on links connecting to an end station. PortFast can cause loops if it is enabled on an interface connected to a network. To enable PortFast on an interface, use the following command. • Enable PortFast on an interface.
– Disable spanning tree on the interface (the no spanning-tree command in INTERFACE mode). – Disabling global spanning tree (the no spanning-tree in CONFIGURATION mode). Figure 125. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: BPDU guard and BPDU filtering both block BPDUs, but are two separate features. BPDU guard: • • is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message.
------------ ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ---------------Te 1/6/1 Root 128.263 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No Te 1/7/1 ErrDis 128.264 128 20000 EDS 20000 P2P No DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/7/1)#do show ip interface brief tengigabitEthernet 1/7/1 Interface IP-Address OK Method Status Protocol TenGigabitEthernet 1/7/1 unassigned YES Manual up up Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge.
In STP topology 3 (shown in the lower middle), if you have enabled the root guard feature on the STP port on Switch C that connects to device D, and device D sends a superior BPDU that would trigger the election of device D as the new root bridge, the BPDU is ignored and the port on Switch C transitions from a forwarding to a root-inconsistent state (shown by the green X icon). As a result, Switch A becomes the root bridge. Figure 126.
• Enable root guard on a port or port-channel interface. INTERFACE mode or INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode spanning-tree {0 | mstp | rstp | pvst} rootguard – – – – 0: enables root guard on an STP-enabled port assigned to instance 0. mstp: enables root guard on an MSTP-enabled port. rstp: enables root guard on an RSTP-enabled port. pvst: enables root guard on a PVST-enabled port.
lower left), Switch C does not receive BPDUs from Switch B. When the max-age timer expires, the STP port on Switch C becomes unblocked and transitions to Forwarding state. A loop is created as both Switch A and Switch C transmit traffic to Switch B. As shown in the following illustration (STP topology 2, upper right), a loop can also be created if the forwarding port on Switch B becomes busy and does not forward BPDUs within the configured forward-delay time.
Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: • Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
Example of Viewing STP Guard Configuration DellEMC#show spanning-tree 0 guard Interface Name Instance Sts Guard type --------- -------- --------- ---------Te 1/1/1 0 INCON(Root) Rootguard Te 1/2/1 0 LIS Loopguard Te 1/3/1 0 EDS (Shut) Bpduguard Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 969
52 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 128.
Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard You are guided through a series of queries to configure SupportAssist. The generated commands are added to the running configuration, including the DNS resolve commands, if configured. This command starts the configuration wizard for the SupportAssist. At any time, you can exit by entering Ctrl-C. If necessary, you can skip some data entry. Enable the SupportAssist service.
making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist. If you are downloading SupportAssist on behalf of a company or other legal entity, you are further certifying to Dell that you have appropriate authority to provide this consent on behalf of that entity.
support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now DellEMC#support-assist activity full-transfer start now DellEMC#support-assist activity core-transfer start now Configuring SupportAssist Activity SupportAssist Activity mode allows you to configure and view the action-manifest file for a specific activity. To configure SupportAssist activity, use the following commands. 1 Move to the SupportAssist Activity mode for an activity.
action-manifest remove DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_file1.json DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_event_file1.json DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 6 Enable a specific SupportAssist activity. By default, the full transfer includes the core files. When you disable the core transfer activity, the full transfer excludes the core files.
Configuring SupportAssist Person SupportAssist Person mode allows you to configure name, email addresses, phone, method and time zone for contacting the person. SupportAssist Person configurations are optional for the SupportAssist service. To configure SupportAssist person, use the following commands. 1 Configure the contact name for an individual.
[no] server server-name DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#server default DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 2 Configure a proxy for reaching the SupportAssist remote server. SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] proxy-ip-address {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}port port-number [ username userid password [encryption-type] password ] DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#proxy-ip-address 10.0.0.
show running-config support-assist DellEMC# show running-config support-assist ! support-assist enable all ! activity event-transfer enable action-manifest install default ! activity core-transfer enable ! contact-company name Dell street-address F lane , Sector 30 address city Brussels state HeadState country Belgium postalcode S328J3 ! contact-person first Fred last Nash email-address primary des@sed.com alternate sed@dol.
53 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
Following conventions established by the telephone industry [BEL86], the accuracy of each server is defined by a number called the stratum, with the topmost level (primary servers) assigned as one and each level downwards (secondary servers) in the hierarchy assigned as one greater than the preceding level. Dell EMC Networking OS synchronizes with a time-serving host to get the correct time. You can set Dell EMC Networking OS to poll specific NTP time-serving hosts for the current time.
Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring NTP Broadcasts • Disabling NTP on an Interface • Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets (optional) Enabling NTP NTP is disabled by default. To enable NTP, specify an NTP server to which the Dell EMC Networking system synchronizes. To specify multiple servers, enter the command multiple times. You may specify an unlimited number of servers at the expense of CPU resources. • Specify the NTP server to which the Dell EMC Networking system synchronizes.
Disabling NTP on an Interface By default, NTP is enabled on all active interfaces. If you disable NTP on an interface, Dell EMC Networking OS drops any NTP packets sent to that interface. To disable NTP on an interface, use the following command. • Disable NTP on the interface. INTERFACE mode ntp disable To view whether NTP is configured on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If ntp disable is not listed in the show config command output, NTP is enabled.
To configure NTP authentication, use the following commands. 1 Enable NTP authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authenticate 2 Set an authentication key. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authentication-key number {md5 | sha1} key Configure the following parameters: 3 • number: the range is from 1 to 65534. This number must be the same as the number in the ntp trusted-key command. • key: enter a text string. This text string is encrypted. Define a trusted key.
ntp server 10.16.127.144 Dell EMC (conf)# Dell EMC#show ntp associations remote vrf-Id ref clock st when poll reach delay offset disp ==================================================================================== LOCAL(0) 0 .LOCL. 7 7 16 7 0.000 0.000 0.002 10.16.127.86 0 10.16.127.26 5 3 16 7 0.498 361.760 0.184 10.16.127.144 0 10.16.127.26 5 1 16 7 0.492 359.171 0.219 10.16.127.44 0 10.16.127.26 5 5 16 7 0.498 355.501 0.
Configuring NTP control key password The Network Time Protocal daemon (NTPD) design uses NTPQ to configure NTPD. NTP control key supports encrypted and unencrypted password options. The ntp control-key- passwd command authenticates NTPQ packets. The default control-key-passwd authenticates the NTPQ packets until the user changes the control-key using the ntp control-key- passwd command. To configure NTP control key password, use the following command. Configure NTP control key password.
Setting the Timezone Universal time coordinated (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. To set the clock timezone, use the following command. • Set the clock to the appropriate timezone.
– end-day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. – end-year: enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. – end-time: enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. – offset: (OPTIONAL) enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
Examples of the clock summer-time recurring Command The following example shows the clock summer-time recurring command.
54 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
interface Tunnel 2 no ip address ipv6 address 2::1/64 tunnel destination 90.1.1.1 tunnel source 60.1.1.1 tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 3 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.
Configuring a Tunnel Interface You can configure the tunnel interface using the ip unnumbered and ipv6 unnumbered commands. To configure the tunnel interface to operate without a unique explicit IP or IPv6 address, select the interface from which the tunnel borrows its address. The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 ip address 20.1.1.
Configuring Tunnel source anylocal Decapsulation The tunnel source anylocal command allows a multipoint receive-only tunnel to decapsulate tunnel packets addressed to any IPv4 or IPv6 (depending on the tunnel mode) address configured on the switch that is operationally UP. The source anylocal parameters can be used for packet decapsulation instead of the ip address or interface (tunnel allowremote command), but only on multipoint receive-only mode tunnels.
55 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link. Feature Description A switch provides upstream connectivity for devices, such as servers. If a switch loses its upstream connectivity, downstream devices also lose their connectivity.
Figure 130. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
Figure 131. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
• • • If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, either a user-configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error. The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest.
4 (Optional) Enable auto-recovery so that UFD-disabled downstream ports in the uplink-state group come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode downstream auto-recover The default is auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled. To disable auto-recovery, use the no downstream auto-recover command. 5 (Optional) Enter a text description of the uplink-state group.
3/5 02:36:43: 3/6 02:36:43: 02:36:43: 02:36:43: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Downstream interface set to UFD error-disabled: Fo %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Fo 3/4 %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Fo 3/5 %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Fo 3/6 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ASTATE_DN: Changed interface Admin state to down: Te 1/7/1 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 1
– group-id: The values are from 1 to 16. Examples of Viewing UFD Information (S50) The following example shows viewing the uplink state group status.
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Time since last interface status change: 00:01:23 The following example shows viewing the UFD configuration.
DellEMC# 00:13:06: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console DellEMC# show running-config uplink-state-group ! uplink-state-group 3 description Testing UFD feature downstream disable links 2 downstream TenGigabitEthernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12/1 upstream TenGigabitEthernet 1/3-4/1 DellEMC# show uplink-state-group 3 Uplink State Group: 3 Status: Enabled, Up DellEMC# show uplink-state-group detail (Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled Uplink State Group : 3 Statu
56 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell EMC Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes. You can download the release notes of your platform at https://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website.
57 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
Default VLAN When you configure interfaces for Layer 2 mode, they are automatically placed in the Default VLAN as untagged interfaces. Only untagged interfaces can belong to the Default VLAN. The following example displays the outcome of placing an interface in Layer 2 mode. To configure an interface for Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command.
VLANs and Port Tagging To add an interface to a VLAN, the interface must be in Layer 2 mode. After you place an interface in Layer 2 mode, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN. supports IEEE 802.1Q tagging at the interface level to filter traffic. When you enable tagging, a tag header is added to the frame after the destination and source MAC addresses. That information is preserved as the frame moves through the network.
• Configure a port-based VLAN (if the VLAN-ID is different from the Default VLAN ID) and enter INTERFACE VLAN mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id To activate the VLAN, after you create a VLAN, assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to the VLAN. Example of Verifying a Port-Based VLAN To view the configured VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/2/1 DellEMC#config DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 4 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#tagged po 1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#show conf ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address tagged Port-channel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#end DellEMC#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T 4 Active T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/2/1
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 Status Active Active 3 Active Q U T T T T Ports Te 1/2/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/3/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1/1 4 Inactive DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 4 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#untagged tengigabitethernet 1/2/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#show config ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address untagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)#end DellEMC#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 3 4 Status Q Inactive Active T T Active T T Ac
Native VLAN support breaks this barrier so that you can connect a port to both VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware stations. Such ports are referred to as hybrid ports. Physical and port-channel interfaces may be hybrid ports. Native VLAN is useful in deployments where a Layer 2 port can receive both tagged and untagged traffic on the same physical port. The classic example is connecting a voice-over-IP (VOIP) phone and a PC to the same port of the switch.
58 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) is a Dell EMC technology that provides two Dell EMC switches the ability to function as a single switch. VLT allows physical links between two Dell EMC switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices.
Figure 134. VLT providing multipath VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and supporting a loop-free topology. To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol. After VLT is established, you may use rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) to prevent loops from forming with new links that are incorrectly connected and outside the VLT domain.
Figure 135. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: • Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. • Eliminates STP-blocked ports. • Provides a loop-free topology. • Uses all available uplink bandwidth. • Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. • Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). • Provides link-level resiliency. • Assures high availability. • Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. • VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. • VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces.
Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains In a VLT domain, the MAC address of any host connected to the VLT peers is synchronized between the VLT nodes. In the following example, VLAN 10 is spanned across three VLT domains. Figure 136. Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains If Host 1 from a VLT domain sends a frame to Host 2 in another VLT domain, the frame can use any link shown to reach Host 2.
30 30 30 30 30 30 a0:00:a1:00:00:07 a0:00:a1:00:00:08 a0:00:a1:00:00:09 a0:00:a1:00:00:0a a0:00:a1:00:00:0b a0:00:a1:00:00:0c Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active Po 11 Active VLT-10-PEER-2#show vlt statistics mac VLT MAC Statistics -------------------L2 Info Pkts sent:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Sent:7 L2 Info Pkts Rcvd:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Rcvd:9 L2 Reg Request sent:0 L2 Reg Request rcvd:0 L2 Reg Response sent:0 L2
Figure 137. VLT on Core Switches The aggregation layer is mostly in the L2/L3 switching/routing layer. For better resiliency in the aggregation, Dell EMC Networking recommends running the internal gateway protocol (IGP) on the VLTi VLAN to synchronize the L3 routing table across the two nodes on a VLT system. Enhanced VLT Enhanced VLT (eVLT)) refers to the ability to connect two VLT domains.
Figure 138. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember • • • • • • • • • • • You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with VLT. If you enable both at the same time, unexpected behavior can occur. VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT.
• BMP uses untagged dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) packets to communicate with the DHCP server. • o disable this feature on VLT and port channels, use no lacp ungroup member-independent {vlt | port-channel} command under the configuration mode. • When you enable IGMP snooping on the VLT peers, ensure the value of the delay-restore command is not less than the query interval.
– A VLT domain supports two chassis members, which appear as a single logical device to network access devices connected to VLT ports through a port channel. – A VLT domain consists of the two core chassis, the interconnect trunk, backup link, and the LAG members connected to attached devices. – Each VLT domain has a unique MAC address that you create or VLT creates automatically. – ARP tables are synchronized between the VLT peer nodes.
– If the size of the MTU for VLTi members is less than 1496 bytes, MAC addresses may not synchronize between VLT peers. Dell EMC Networking does not recommend using an MTU size lower than the default of 1554 bytes for VLTi members. • VLT backup link – In the backup link between peer switches, heartbeat messages are exchanged between the two chassis for health checks. The default time interval between heartbeat messages over the backup link is 1 second. You can configure this interval.
• Software features supported on VLT physical ports – In a VLT domain, the following software features are supported on VLT physical ports: 802.1p, LLDP, flow control, IPv6 dynamic routing, port monitoring, DHCP snooping, and jumbo frames. • Software features not supported with VLT – In a VLT domain, the following software features are not supported on VLT ports: 802.1x, GVRP, and BFD.
RSTP and VLT VLT provides loop-free redundant topologies and does not require RSTP. RSTP can cause temporary port state blocking and may cause topology changes after link or node failures. Spanning tree topology changes are distributed to the entire layer 2 network, which can cause a network-wide flush of learned MAC and ARP addresses, requiring these addresses to be re-learned. However, enabling RSTP can detect potential loops caused by non-system issues such as cabling errors or incorrect configurations.
VLT IPv6 The following features have been enhanced to support IPv6: • VLT Sync — Entries learned on the VLT interface are synced on both VLT peers. • Non-VLT Sync — Entries learned on non-VLT interfaces are synced on both VLT peers. • Tunneling — Control information is associated with tunnel traffic so that the appropriate VLT peer can mirror the ingress port as the VLT interface rather than pointing to the VLT peer’s VLTi link.
Figure 139. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
Each VLT peer runs its own PIM protocol independently of other VLT peers. To ensure the PIM protocol states or multicast routing information base (MRIB) on the VLT peers are synced, if the incoming interface (IIF) and outgoing interface (OIF) are Spanned, the multicast route table is synced between the VLT peers. To verify the PIM neighbors on the VLT VLAN and on the multicast port, use the show ip pim neighbor, show ip igmp snooping mrouter, and show running config commands.
Figure 140. Packets without peer routing enabled If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 141. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing • • Avoids sub-optimal routing • Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
• You can reduce the number of VLTi port channel members based on your specific design. With peer routing, you need not configure VRRP for the participating VLANs. As both VLT nodes act as a gateway for its peer, irrespective of the gateway IP address, the traffic flows upstream without any latency. There is no limitation for the number of VLANS. VLT Unicast Routing VLT unicast routing is a type of VLT peer routing that locally routes unicast packets destined for the L3 endpoint of the VLT peer.
The advantages of syncing the multicast routes between VLT peers are: • VLT resiliency — After a VLT link or peer failure, if the traffic hashes to the VLT peer, the traffic continues to be routed using multicast until the PIM protocol detects the failure and adjusts the multicast distribution tree. • Optimal routing — The VLT peer that receives the incoming traffic can directly route traffic to all downstream routers connected on VLT ports.
NOTE: ARP entries learned on non-VLT, non-spanned VLANs are not synced with VLT peers. RSTP Configuration RSTP is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure RSTP in the network. RSTP is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase. You may also use RSTP for loop prevention in the network outside of the VLT port channel. For information about how to configure RSTP, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Run RSTP on both VLT peer switches.
Configure RSTP on VLT peers to prevent forwarding loops—VLT peer 1 (primary) Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 4096 Configure RSTP on VLT peers to prevent forwarding loops—VLT peer 2 (secondary) Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 8192 NOTE: When you remove the VLT configuration, RSTP is recommended as a backup solution to avoid
CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2 Remove any IP address from the interface if already present. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no ip address 3 Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel.
You can optionally specify the time interval used to send hello messages. The range is from 1 to 5 seconds. 3 Configure the port channel to be used as the VLT interconnect between VLT peers in the domain. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 4 Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer.
4 Configure a VLT backup link using the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the VLT peer’s management interface. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode back-up destination {ip address ipv4-address/ mask | ipv6 address ipv6-address/ mask} 5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 on the VLT peer switch. To set an amount of time, in seconds, to delay the system from restoring the VLT port, use the delay-restore command at any time. For more information, refer to VLT Port Delayed Restoration.
Use this command to minimize the time required for the VLT system to synchronize the default MAC address of the VLT domain on both peer switches when one peer switch reboots. 4 (Optional) When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell EMC Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode unit-id {0 | 1} To explicitly configure the default values on each peer switch, use the unit-id command.
8 On an attached switch or server: To connect to the VLT domain and add port channels to it, configure a port channel. For an example of how to verify the port-channel configuration, refer to VLT Sample Configuration. To configure the VLAN where a VLT peer forwards received packets over the VLTi from an adjacent VLT peer that is down, use the peerdown-vlan parameter. When a VLT peer with BMP reboots, untagged DHCP discover packets are sent to the peer over the VLTi.
peer-link port-channel id-number 5 Configure the IP address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out-of-band hello messages. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode back-up destination ip-address [interval seconds] You can optionally specify the time interval used to send hello messages. The range is from 1 to 5 seconds.
interface range {port-channel id} 13 Enable LACP on the LAN port. INTERFACE mode port-channel-protocol lacp 14 Configure the LACP port channel mode. INTERFACE mode port-channel number mode [active] 15 Ensure that the interface is active. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode no shutdown 16 Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 17 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 1.
show interfaces interface 8 Configure the VLT links between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the top of rack unit (shown in the following example). 9 Configure the static LAG/LACP between ports connected from VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the top of rack unit. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config entity 10 Configure the VLT peer link port channel id in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface 11 In the top of rack unit, configure LACP in the physical ports.
Dell-4#show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 5 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.11.206.43 Dell-4# Dell-4#show running-config interface managementethernet 1/1 ip address 10.11.206.58/16 no shutdown Configure the VLT links between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the Top of Rack unit. In the following example, port Te 1/4/1 in VLT peer 1 is connected to Te 1/8/1 of ToR and port Te 1/18/1 in VLT peer 2 is connected to Te 1/30/1 of ToR.
no shutdown s60-1#show interfaces port-channel 100 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel L LAG 100 Mode L2 Status up Uptime 03:33:48 Ports Te 1/8/1 (Up) Te 1/30/1 (Up) Verify VLT is up. Verify that the VLTi (ICL) link, backup link connectivity (heartbeat status), and VLT peer link (peer chassis) are all up.
Sample PVST+ Configuration The following examples show the PVST+ configuration that you must perform on each peer switch to prevent forwarding loops.
Figure 142. Peer Routing Configuration Example Dell-1 Switch Configuration In the following output, RSTP is enabled with a bridge priority of 0. This ensures that Dell-1 becomes the root bridge. DellEMC#1#show run | find protocol protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 1,20,800,900 bridge-priority 0 The following output shows the existing VLANs.
The following is the configuration in interfaces: DellEMC#1#sh run int ma0/0 interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 description Used_for_VLT_Keepalive ip address 10.10.10.1/24 no shutdown (The management interfaces are part of a default VRF and are isolated from the switch’s data plane.) In Dell-1, te 0/0 and te 0/1 are used for VLTi.
Port channel 2 connects the access switch A1. DellEMC#1#sh run int po2 interface Port-channel 2 description port-channel_to_access_switch_A1 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown Vlan 20 is used in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 to form OSPF adjacency. When OSPF is converged, the routing tables in all devices are synchronized. DellEMC#1#sh run int vlan 20 interface Vlan 20 description OSPF PEERING VLAN ip address 192.168.20.
----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: Destination VRF: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.10.10.2 Up default 1 3 34998 4 5 Use the show vlt detail command to verify that VLT is functional and that the correct VLANs are allowed.
Verify if peer routing has populated the CAM table with the correct information using the show cam mac command.
no ip address no shutdown The following example shows that te 0/0 and te 0/1 are included in port channel 10. Also note that configuration on the VLTi links does not contain the switchport command. Dell-2#sh run int po10 interface Port-channel 10 description VLTi Port-Channel no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/0-1 no shutdown Te 0/4 connects to the access switch A1.
tagged Port-channel 2 no shutdown The following output shows Dell-2 is configured with VLT domain 1. The peer-link port-channel command makes port channel 10 as the VLTi link. The peer-routing command enables peer routing between VLT peers in VLT domain 1. The IP address configured with the backupdestination command is the management IP address of the VLT peer (Dell-1). A priority value of 55000 makes Dell-2 as the secondary VLT peer.
network 192.168.8.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.9.0/24 area 0 network 172.16.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.20.0/29 area 0 passive-interface default no passive-interface vlan 20 While the passive-interface default command prevents all interfaces from establishing an OSPF neighborship, the no passive-interface vlan 20 command allows the interface for VLAN 20, the OSPF peering VLAN, to establish OSPF adjacencies. The following output displays that Dell-1 forms neighborship with Dell-2 and R1.
! interface Loopback4 ip address 4.4.4.2 255.255.255.0 R1#show run int port-channel 1 interface Port-channel1 switchport ip address 192.168.20.3 255.255.255.248 R1#show run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.15.1.1 passive-interface default no passive-interface Port-channel1 network 2.2.2.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 3.3.3.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 4.4.4.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 (The above subnets correspond to loopback interfaces lo2, lo3 and lo4.
This default route is configured for testing purposes, as described in the next section. The access switch (A1) is used to generate ICMP test PINGs to a loopback interface on CR1. This default route points to DellEMC#2’s VLAN 800 SVI interface. It’s in place to ensure that routed test traffic has DellEMC#2’s MAC address as the destination address in the Ethernet frame’s header When A1 sends a packet to R1, the VLT peers act as the default gateway for each other.
Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface range tengigabitethernet 1/16/1 - 1/16/2 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16/1-2)# port-channel-protocol LACP Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16/1-2)# port-channel 100 mode active Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16/1-2)# no shutdown Next, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 2.
Domain_1_Peer4#no shutdown Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#vlt domain 200 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.18.130.12 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# system-mac mac-address 00:0b:00:0b:00:0b Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-routing Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# unit-id 1 Configure eVLT on Peer 4.
Verifying a VLT Configuration To monitor the operation or verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the following show commands on the primary and secondary VLT switches. • Display information on backup link operation. EXEC mode • show vlt backup-link Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch.
HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 3 34998 1026 1025 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.20 Up 1 3 34998 1030 1014 The following example shows the show vlt brief command.
VLT Role ---------VLT Role: System MAC address: System Role Priority: Local System MAC address: Local System Role Priority: Secondary 00:01:e8:8a:df:bc 32768 00:01:e8:8a:df:e6 32768 The following example shows the show running-config vlt command. Dell_VLTpeer1# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.18 Dell_VLTpeer2# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 We are the root Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID ---------- -------- ---- ------- -------- - ------- ------------Po 1 128.2 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.2 Po 3 128.4 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.4 Po 4 128.
NUM Status Description Q Ports 10 Active U Po110(Fo 1/8) T Po100(Fo 1/5,6) Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 2) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#vlt domain 999 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.11.206.23 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#exit Configure the backup link.
Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur, use the following information. NOTE: For information on VLT Failure mode timing and its impact, contact your Dell EMC Networking representative. Table 132. Troubleshooting VLT Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Bandwidth monitoring A syslog error message and an SNMP trap is generated when the VLTi bandwidth usage goes above the 80% threshold and when it drops below 80%.
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take information, refer to the Release Notes for this release. VLT LAG ID is not configured on one VLT peer A syslog error message is generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. A syslog error message is generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. Verify the VLT LAG ID is configured correctly on both VLT peers. VLT LAG ID mismatch The VLT port channel is brought down.
Keep the following points in mind when you configure VLT nodes in a PVLAN: • Configure the VLTi link to be in trunk mode. Do not configure the VLTi link to be in access or promiscuous mode. • You can configure a VLT LAG or port channel to be in trunk, access, or promiscuous port modes when you include the VLT LAG in a PVLAN. The VLT LAG settings must be the same on both the peers. If you configure a VLT LAG as a trunk port, you can associate that LAG to be a member of a normal VLAN or a PVLAN.
PVLAN Operations When One VLT Peer is Down When a VLT port moves to the Admin or Operationally Down state on only one of the VLT nodes, the VLT Lag is still considered to be up. All the PVLAN MAC entries that correspond to the operationally down VLT LAG are maintained as synchronized entries in the device. These MAC entries are removed when the peer VLT LAG also becomes inactive or a change in PVLAN configuration occurs.
Table 133.
VLT LAG Mode Peer1 PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN Peer2 ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 - Primary VLAN Y - Primary VLAN X No No Promiscuous Access Primary Secondary No No Trunk Access Primary/Normal Secondary No No Configuring a VLT VLAN or LAG in a PVLAN You can configure the VLT peers or nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN).
7 Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 8 (Optional) To configure a VLT LAG, enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down.
• Specified with this command even before they have been created. • Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list. Proxy ARP Capability on VLT Peer Nodes The proxy ARP functionality is supported on VLT peer nodes. A proxy ARP-enabled device answers the ARP requests that are destined for the other router in a VLT domain. The local host forwards the traffic to the proxy ARP-enabled device, which in turn transmits the packets to the destination. By default, proxy ARP is enabled.
When a VLT node detects peer up, it does not perform proxy ARP for the peer IP addresses. IP address synchronization occurs again between the VLT peers. Proxy ARP is enabled only if you enable peer routing on both the VLT peers. If you disable peer routing by using the no peerroutingcommand in VLT DOMAIN node, a notification is sent to the VLT peer to disable the proxy ARP.
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode vlan-stack {access | trunk} 2 Configure VLAN as VLAN-stack compatible on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible 3 Add the VLT LAG as a member to the VLAN-stack on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode member port-channel port—channel ID 4 Verify the VLAN-stack configurations.
DellEMC#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown DellEMC# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as Members to the VLAN DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 50 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 DellEMC#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-sta
DellEMC(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown DellEMC#show running-config interface port-channel 10 ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport vlan-stack access vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 no shutdown DellEMC# DellEMC(conf)#interface port-channel 20 DellEMC(conf-if-po-20)#switchport DellEMC(conf-if-po-20)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 DellEMC(conf-if-po-20)#vlan-stack trunk DellEMC(conf-if-po-20)#no shutdown DellEMC#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switc
IPv6 Peer Routing in VLT Domains Overview VLT enables the physical links between two devices that are called VLT nodes or peers, and within a VLT domain, to be considered as a single logical link to external devices that are connected using LAG bundles to both the VLT peers. This capability enables redundancy without the implementation of Spanning tree protocol (STP), thereby providing a loop-free network with optimal bandwidth utilization.
Synchronization of IPv6 ND Entries in a Non-VLT Domain Layer 3 VLT provides a higher resiliency at the Layer 3 forwarding level. Routed VLT allows you to replace VRRP with routed VLT to route the traffic from Layer 2 access nodes. With ND synchronization, both the VLT nodes perform Layer 3 forwarding on behalf of each other. Synchronization of NDPM entries learned on non-VLT interfaces between the non-VLT nodes.
Figure 144. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C.
Figure 145. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Neighbor Solicitation from VLT Hosts Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL.
Consider a situation in which NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node1 on a non-VLT interface and NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node2 on a non-VLT interface. When VLT node1 receives NA on a VLT interface, it learns the Host MAC address on the received interface. This learned neighbor entry is synchronized to VLT node2 as it is learned on ICL.
Non-VLT host to Non-VLT host traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to the non-VLT host, it does neighbor entry lookup and routes traffic over ICL interface. If traffic reaches wrong VLT peer, it routes the traffic over ICL. Router Solicitation When VLT node receives router Solicitation on VLT interface/non-VLT interface it consumes the packets and will send RA back on the received interface. VLT node will drop the RS message if it is received over ICL interface.
ToR 1 Enable BFD globally. TOR(conf)# bfd enable 2 Configure a VLT peer LAG.
VLT Primary 1 Enable BFD globally. VLT_Primary(conf)# bfd enable 2 Configure port channel which is used as VLTi link. VLT_Primary(conf)# interface port-channel 100 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# no ip address VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# channel-member tengigabitethernet 1/1/1, 1/1/2 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown 3 Enable VLT and configure a VLT domain.
VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#port-channel 10 mode active VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#no shutdown VLT_Primary(conf)#interface port-channel 10 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#no ip address VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#switchport VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown 5 Configure a VLAN VLT_Secondary(conf)#interface vlan 100 VLT_Secondary(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 100.1.1.
Peer-Routing-Timeout timer: 0 seconds Multicast peer-routing timeout: 150 seconds VXLAN on VLT VLT peers are two nodes in the network that are loosely coupled. It provides high availability to the other ends. VXLAN on VLT provides resiliency to the servers connected to southbound port-channels and VTEPS connected through L3 cloud to northbound interfaces. As gateway IP address configuration on both peers is the same, remote VTEP’s view it as a single node.
Static VXLAN Configuration in a VLT setup Configuration steps are covered below: 1 2 Both Gateway VTEPs need VLT configured. • ICL port configuration interface Port-channel 1 no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/4-5 no shutdown • VLT Domain Configuration vlt domain 100 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.11.70.14 • VXLAN Instance Configuration vxlan-instance 1 static local-vtep-ip 14.14.14.14 no shutdown vni-profile test vnid 200 remote-vtep-ip 3.3.3.
59 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
Figure 146. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: • Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. • You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
• You cannot change the VLT LAG to a legacy LAG when it is part of proxy-gateway. • You cannot change the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) port channel interface to a legacy LAG when you enable a proxy gateway. • Dell EMC Networking recommends the vlt-peer-mac transmit command only for square VLTs without diagonal links. • The virtual router redundancy (VRRP) protocol and IPv6 routing is not supported. • Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported.
• You must configure the interface proxy gateway LLDP to enable or disable a proxy-gateway LLDP TLV on specific interfaces. • The interface is typically a VLT port-channel that connects to a remote VLT domain. • The new proxy gateway TLV is carried on the physical links under the port channel only. • You must have at least one link connection to each unit of the VLT domain. Following are the prerequisites for Proxy Gateway LLDP configuration: • You must globally enable LLDP.
LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway in a Square VLT Topology Figure 147. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway • The preceding figure shows a sample square VLT Proxy gateway topology. There are no diagonal links in the square VLT connection between the C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in the VLT domain 2. This causes sub-optimal routing.
• Any L3 packet, when it gets an L3 hit and is routed, it has a time to live (TTL) decrement as expected. • You can disable the VLT Proxy Gateway for a particular VLAN using an "Exclude-VLAN" configuration. The configuration has to be done in both the VLT domains [C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in VLT domain 2].
Figure 148. VLT Proxy Gateway Sample Topology VLT Domain Configuration Dell-1 and Dell-2 constitute VLT domain 120. Dell-3 and Dell-4 constitute VLT domain 110. These two VLT domains are connected using a VLT LAG P0 50. To know how to configure the interfaces in VLT domains, see the Configuring VLT section. Dell-1 VLT Configuration vlt domain 120 peer-link port-channel 120 back-up destination 10.1.1.
switchport no spanning-tree vlt-peer-lag port-channel 50 no shutdown Note that on the inter-domain link, the switchport command is enabled. On a VLTi link between VLT peers in a VLT domain, the switchport command is not used. VLAN 100 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between Dell-1 and Dell-2. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF Peering VLAN to Dell-2 ip address 10.10.100.1/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown VLAN 101 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between the two VLT domains.
The following output shows that Dell-1 forms OSPF neighborship with Dell-2. Dell-2#sh ip ospf nei Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.100.1 Vl 100 0 Dell-3 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
The following output shows that Dell-4 and VLT domain 120 form OSPF neighborship with Dell-3. Dell-3#sh ip ospf nei ! Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.101.1 Vl 101 0 1.1.1.1 1 FULL/ - 00:00:34 10.10.102.2 Vl 102 0 Dell-4 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
60 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Overview The switch acts as the VXLAN gateway and performs the VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) functionality. VXLAN is a technology where in the data traffic from the virtualized servers is transparently transported over an existing legacy network. Figure 149. VXLAN Gateway NOTE: In a stack setup, the Dell EMC Networking OS does not support VXLAN.
• VXLAN Service nodes for BFD • Static Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) • Preserving 802.1 p value across VXLAN tunnels • VXLAN Scenario • Routing in and out of VXLAN tunnels • NSX Controller-based VXLAN for VLT Components of VXLAN network VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network. In short, VXLAN is an L2 overlay scheme over an L3 network and this overlay is termed as a VXLAN segment.
• Binds the Port and VLAN to logical networks based on messages from the NVP. • Binds MACs to the VTEP and logical network based on messages from the NVP. • Advertises MACs learnt on south-facing VXLAN capable-ports to the NVP client. VXLAN Hypervisor It is the VTEP that connects the Virtual Machines (VM) to the underlay legacy network to the physical infrastructure. Service Node(SN) It is also another VTEP, but it is fully managed by the controller.
Components of VXLAN Frame Format Some of the important fields of the VXLAN frame format are described below: Outer Ethernet Header: Outer IP Header: The Outer Ethernet Header consists of the following components: • Destination Address: Generally, it is a first hop router's MAC address when the VTEP is on a different address. • Source Address : It is the source MAC address of the router that routes the packet.
• Supports only 4 remote vteps through a single interface in a broadcast domain. – When a fifth remote VTEP configured is reachable via the same network port, traffic destined to the fifth remote VTEP flows to the first remote VTEP configured via the same network port. If any of the first four remote VTEPS configured via the same network port is removed, traffic flow to the fifth remote VTEP is not restored.
To create service node, the required fields are the IP address and SSL certificate of the server. The Service node is responsible for broadcast/unknown unicast/multicast traffic replication. The following is the snapshot of the user interface for the creation of service node: Select Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices. Under Hardware Devices, click the Add button. The Add hardware Device window opens.
3 Add a service node or replicator. Under Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices > Replication Cluster, click the Edit button. Select required hosts for replication and click OK. Figure 153. Add Service Node or Replicator NOTE: Ensure L3 reachability between the VTEP and the replicator. 4 Create Logical Switch. You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch.
Figure 154. Create Logical Switch 5 Create Logical Switch Port. A logical switch port provides a logical connection point for a VM interface (VIF) and a L2 gateway connection to an external network. It binds the virtual access ports in the gateway to logical network (VXLAN) and VLAN. In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, expand a VTEP and click Add. The Manage Hardware Bindings Window opens. Click the Select link and the Specify Hardware Port window opens. Click the hardware port and click OK.
Figure 155. Specify Hardware Port In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, under the VLAN column, enter the VLAN ID and press OK.
Figure 156. Create Logical Switch Port 6 (Optional) Enable or disable BFD globally. Go to Hardware Devices tab > BFD Configuration, and click the Edit button. The Edit BFD Configuration windows opens. Check or uncheck the Enable BFD check box. You can also change the probe interval if required.
Figure 157. Edit VXLAN BFD Configuration NOTE: For more details about NSX controller configuration, refer to the NSX user guide from VMWare . Configuring and Controling VXLAN from Nuage Controller GUI The Dell EMC Networking OS supports Nuage controller for VXLAN. You can configure and control VXLAN from the Nuage controller GUI, by adding a hardware device to the Nuage controller and authenticating the device. 1 Under the Infrastructure tab, add a datacenter gateway.
Figure 158. Add Data center Gateway 2 Create port-to-VLAN mappings. Figure 159. Port-to-VLAN mappings 3 Under the Networks tab, create an L2 domain. Under the L2 domain, create a logical network (VNI) and add access ports of the VTEP in the logical network. Figure 160.
Configuring VxLAN Gateway To configure the VxLAN gateway on the switch, follow these steps: 1 Connecting to NVP controller 2 Advertising VXLAN access ports to controller Connecting to an NVP Controller To connect to an NVP controller, use the following commands. 1 Enable the VXLAN feature. CONFIGURATION mode feature vxlan You must configure feature VXLAN to configure vxlan-instance. 2 Create a VXLAN instance that connects to the controller.
Advertising VXLAN Access Ports to Controller To advertise the access ports to the controller, use the following command. In INTERFACE mode, vxlan-instance command configures a VXLAN-Access Port into a VXLAN-instance. INTERFACE mode vxlan-instance NOTE: In NSX-based VXLAN environment, the removal of a port specific to virtual network binding from a VTEP clears all remote MAC address entries of the virtual network in remote VTEP node.
The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance physical-locator command. Instance: 1 Tunnel : count 3 4.3.3.3 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) 6.6.6.2 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) 6.6.6.3 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance unicast-mac-local command.
* 3.3.3.3 * 3.3.3.3 192.168.122.138 192.168.122.139 Te 1/38 Te 1/42 Up Up 1000 1000 1000 1000 3 3 VT VT Static Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) When you create a Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) , you need Network Virtualization Platform (NVP) Controller to configure and control the VXLAN. When you create a VXLAN instance in static mode, you can configure the VXLAN using CLIs instead of using the Controller.
INTERFACE mode vxlan-instance Instance ID 9 Associate VNID to VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vxlan-vnid VNID Displaying Static VXLAN Configurations To display the static VXLAN configurations, use the following commands. Examples of the show vxlan-instance Command The following example displays the basic configuration details. DellEMC# show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 Instance : 1 Mode : Static Admin State : Up Local vtep ip : 101.101.101.
Preserving 802.1 p value across VXLAN tunnels The 802.1p QoS marking preservation is supported over the VXLAN tunnel. The 802.1p priority is carried over from the VXLAN tunnel to the remote VTEP—VXLAN tunnel endpoint. The packets egress out to the correct queue based on the priority value. In such a scenario, if there is any congestion in the queue, the system generates a pause. The network port should be a vlan for priority to be carried by the vxlan outer header.
Physical Loopback for VXLAN RIOT The following topology shows how VXLAN RIOT can be achieved using physical loopbacks. Two port-channels, vxlan and non-vxlan loopback port-channel, are created in the device. Interface connected at one end of the physical loopback cable is/are added as member of the non-vxlan loopback port-channel (P2/P6) and other end interfaces as a member of vxlan loopback port-channel (P3/P7).
Internal Loopback for VXLAN RIOT The following topology shows how VXLAN RIOT can be achieved using an internal loopback port channel. Internal loopback port-channel is formed by adding the free ports in the device as a member to the vxlan loopback port-channel. There is no need for non-vxlan loopback port-channel in this scenario. • When you ping for 10.1.2.1 (Vlan 20’s IP on R2) from R1, the packet would get to P1 on VTEP 1 with Vlan 10, and try to get routed out of P2 on Vlan 20.
• Any frame ingressing on a VXLAN loopback port is not allowed to egress out of a VXLAN access port. • Any frame ingressing on a Non-VXLAN loopback port is not allowed to egress out of a VXLAN access port. • Any frame ingressing on a Non-VXLAN loopback port is not allowed to egress out of a VXLAN loopback port. Routing protocols and other control protocols are not supported over VXLAN tunnel (with the exception of VRRP). Admin VRRP is not supported over VXLAN tunnel.
In this topology, P2 and P3 in VTEP 1 are VLT port-channels with corresponding VLT peer LAGs being P2 and P3 in VTEP 2. Similarly, P6 and P7 in VTEP 3 are VLT port-channels with corresponding VLT peer LAGs being P6 and P7 in VTEP 4. NOTE: P2, P3, P6, and P7 can be a single port or multi-port port-channels that are VLT port-channels. NOTE: The VLT VXLAN configuration for RIOT deviates from the standard VLT behavior when these physical loopbacks are provisioned as VLT port-channels.
Figure 162. Controller-based VXLAN for VLT Providing Redundancy Important Points to Remember • The VLT peer port channel number must be the same on both VLT peers. • before configuring controller-based VXLAN with VLT, remove any existing standalone VXLAN configuration. • BFD tunnels come up only after the NSX controller sends tunnel details. The details come after the remote MAC addresses are downloaded from NSX controller.
Configuring BFD and UFD for VXLAN For controller-based VXLAN, you can optionally configure BFD and UFD for more resiliency. To configure BFD and UFD, follow these steps: 1 Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable Enter the result of your step here (optional). 2 Create an uplink-state group. CONFIGURATION mode uplink-state-group group-id group-id: values are from 1 to 16. 3 Assign a VLT port channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream link.
peer-ovsdbserver-ip ovsdb-IP-address The peer OVSDB server is the peer VLT device. 6 Enter the fail mode. VxLAN INSTANCE mode fail-mode secure 7 Enable the VxLAN instance. VxLAN INSTANCE mode no shutdown NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends the non-secure fail mode if you are configuring VxLAN for a VLT setup and use a physical L3 link for peer OVSDB connectivity. Also using of controller connected IP address for peer OVSDB connectivity leads to double failure, when connected link fails..
unit-id NOTE: For controller-based VxLAN, the VLT unit ID is mandatory. 8 Repeat these steps on the VLT peer switch. VLT configuration: DellEMC#show runn vlt ! vlt domain 100 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 38.0.0.
Admin State Controller Type Management IP Gateway IP MAX Backoff Controller 1 Managers Fail Mode Port List Te 1/21 : : : : : : : : : : : : Po 10 enabled Nsx 10.16.140.36 4.3.3.3 8000 10.16.140.181:6640 ssl 10.16.140.181:6640 ssl (connected) 10.16.140.182:6640 ssl (connected) 10.16.140.
DellEMC#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 physical-locator Instance : 1 Tunnel : count 1 6.6.6.2 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) DellEMC# DellEMC# DellEMC#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 unicast-mac-local Total Local Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC PORT 5000 00:00:00:cc:00:00 Te 1/21 VLAN 20 DellEMC# DellEMC#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 unicast-mac-remote Total Remote Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC TUNNEL 5000 00:00:bb:00:00:00 4.3.3.
Mode Admin State Controller Type Management IP Gateway IP MAX Backoff Controller 1 Managers Fail Mode Port List Te 1/21 : : : : : : : : : : : : : Po 10 Controller enabled Nsx 10.16.140.37 4.3.3.3 8000 10.16.140.181:6640 ssl 10.16.140.181:6640 ssl (connected via vltPeer) 10.16.140.182:6640 ssl (connected via vltPeer) 10.16.140.
DellEMC#show cam mac stack-unit 1 port-set 0 VlanId Mac Address Region Interface 500 14:18:77:0a:53:82 STATIC Po 1 500 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff STATIC 00001 28674 00:00:00:cc:00:00 DYNAMIC 0x80000001(vxlan) 28674 00:00:bb:00:00:00 DYNAMIC 0x80000006(vxlan) 0 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff STATIC 00001 1 00:01:e8:8b:7a:6e DYNAMIC Po 11 20 00:00:00:cc:00:00 STATIC Po 1 0 00:10:18:ff:ff:ff STATIC Invalid 500 34:17:eb:37:11:02 DYNAMIC Po 1 0 f4:8e:38:2b:3e:87 LOCAL_DA 00001 0 f4:8e:38:2b:3e:87 LOCAL_DA 00001 0 14:18:77:0a:53:82 LO
Select Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices. Under Hardware Devices, click the Add button. The Add hardware Device window opens. Enter a name and copy the generated certificate of the VTEP to the Certificate box and click OK. Figure 163. Create VXLAN Gateway To create a VXLAN L2 Gateway, the IP address of the Gateway is required.
Under Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices > Replication Cluster, click the Edit button. Select required hosts for replication and click OK. Figure 165. Add Service Node or Replicator NOTE: Ensure L3 reachability between the VTEP and the replicator. 4 Create Logical Switch. You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch. The logical network acts as the forwarding domain for workloads on the physical as well as virtual infrastructure.
Figure 166. Create Logical Switch 5 Create Logical Switch Port. A logical switch port provides a logical connection point for a VM interface (VIF) and a L2 gateway connection to an external network. It binds the virtual access ports in the gateway to logical network (VXLAN) and VLAN. In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, expand a VTEP and click Add. The Manage Hardware Bindings Window opens. Click the Select link and the Specify Hardware Port window opens. Click the hardware port and click OK.
Figure 167. Specify Hardware Port In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, under the VLAN column, enter the VLAN ID and press OK.
Figure 168. Create Logical Switch Port 6 (Optional) Enable or disable BFD globally. Go to Hardware Devices tab > BFD Configuration, and click the Edit button. The Edit BFD Configuration windows opens. Check or uncheck the Enable BFD check box. You can also change the probe interval if required.
Figure 169. Edit VXLAN BFD Configuration NOTE: For more details about NSX controller configuration, refer to the NSX user guide from VMWare .
61 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time. VRF Overview VRF improves functionality by allowing network paths to be segmented without using multiple devices.
Figure 170. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
If the next-hop IP in a static route VRF statement is VRRP IP of another VRF, this static route does not get installed on the VRRP master. VRF supports some routing protocols only on the default VRF (default-vrf) instance. Table 1 displays the software features supported in VRF and whether they are supported on all VRF instances or only the default VRF. NOTE: To configure a router ID in a non-default VRF, configure at least one IP address in both the default as well as the nondefault VRF. Table 134.
Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF OSPFv3 Yes Yes IS-IS Yes Yes BGP Yes Yes ACL Yes No Multicast No No NDP Yes Yes RAD Yes Yes DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance.
Assigning an Interface to a VRF You must enter the ip vrf forwarding command before you configure the IP address or any other setting on an interface. NOTE: You can configure an IP address or subnet on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP address or subnet configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If two interfaces are assigned to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address on them.
show ip vrf [vrf-name] Assigning an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance OSPF routes are supported on all VRF instances. See the Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2) chapter for complete OSPF configuration information. Assign an OSPF process to a VRF instance . Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPF process. The OSPF Process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process, and the Router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process.
Task Command Syntax Command Mode 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 43, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Configuring Management VRF You can assign a management interface to a management VRF. NOTE: The loopback interface cannot be added into the management VRF. 1 Create a management VRF.
Configuring a Static Route • Configure a static route that points to a management interface. CONFIGURATION management route ip-address mask managementethernet ormanagement route ipv6-address prefixlength managementethernet You can also have the management route to point to a front-end port in case of the management VRF. For example: management route 2::/64 tengigabitethernet 1/1/1. • Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery.
Figure 172. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.
ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 128 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.
ip address 2.0.0.2/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.2/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2/1 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.
DellEMC#show ip route vrf orange Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination ----------2.0.0.0/24 20.0.0.
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway ----------------C 1.0.0.0/24 Direct, Vl 128 O 10.0.0.0/24 via 1.0.0.1, Vl 128 C 11.0.0.
The following example illustrates how route leaking between two VRFs can be performed: interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/9/1 ip vrf forwarding VRF1 ip address 120.0.0.1/24 interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10/1 ip vrf forwarding VRF2 ip address 140.0.0.1/24 ip route vrf VRF1 20.0.0.0/16 140.0.0.2 vrf VRF2 ip route vrf VRF2 40.0.0.0/16 120.0.0.
ip vrf vrf-shared interface interface-type slot/port[/subport] ip vrf forwarding vrf-shared ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-Shared is created and the interface 1/4/1 is assigned to this VRF. 2 Configure the export target in the source VRF:. ip route-export 1:1 3 Configure VRF-red. ip vrf vrf-red interface-type slot/port[/subport] ip vrf forwarding VRF-red ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF.
The show run output for the above configuration is as follows: ip vrf ip ip ! ip vrf ip ip ! ip vrf ! ip vrf ip ip ip VRF-Red route-export route-import 2:2 1:1 VRF-Blue route-export route-import 3:3 1:1 VRF-Green VRF-shared route-export route-import route-import 1:1 2:2 3:3 Show routing tables of all the VRFs (without any route-export and route-import tags being configured) DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O 11.1.1.1/32 via 111.1.1.1 110/0 C 111.1.1.
C 133.3.3.0/24 Direct, Te 1/13/1 0/0 22:39:61 DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Shared O 11.1.1.1/32 via VRF-Red:111.1.1.1 110/0 00:00:10 C 111.1.1.0/24 Direct, VRF-Red:Te 1/11/1 0/0 22:39:59 O 22.2.2.2/32 via VRF-Blue:122.2.2.2 110/0 00:00:11 C 122.2.2.0/24 Direct, VRF-Blue:Te 1/22/1 0/0 22:39:61 O 44.4.4.4/32 via 144.4.4.4 110/0 00:00:11 C 144.4.4.
ip vrf vrf-red interface-type slot/port[/subport] ip vrf forwarding VRF-red ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 2 Define a route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol. DellEMC(config)route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol permit 10 3 Define the matching criteria for the exported routes.
The show VRF commands displays the following output: DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue C 122.2.2.0/24 Direct, Te 1/22/1 0/0 O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 110/0 00:00:11 O 44.4.4.4/32 22:39:61 via vrf-red:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 << only OSPF and BGP leaked from VRF-red Important Points to Remember • Only Active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if VRF-A has two routes from BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active. In this scenario, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP.
62 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN).
Figure 173. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. In conjunction with Virtual Link Trunking (VLT), you can configure optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP).
CAUTION: Increasing the advertisement interval increases the VRRP Master dead interval, resulting in an increased failover time for Master/Backup election. Take caution when increasing the advertisement interval, as the increased dead interval may cause packets to be dropped during that switch-over time. NOTE: In a VLT environment, VRRP configuration acts as active-active and if route is not present in any of the VRRP nodes, the packet to the destination is dropped on that VRRP node. Table 136.
The VRID range is from 1 to 255. • NOTE: The interface must already have a primary IP address defined and be enabled, as shown in the second example. Delete a VRRP group. INTERFACE mode no vrrp-group vrid Examples of Configuring and Verifying VRRP The following examples how to configure VRRP. DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration.
Example: Migrating an IPv4 VRRP Group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3 NOTE: Carefully following this procedure, otherwise you might introduce dual master switches issues. To migrate an IPv4 VRRP Group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3: 1 Set the backup switches to VRRP version to both. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-100)#version both Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-te-1/2/1-vrid-100)#version both 2 Set the master switch to VRRP protocol version 3.
Examples of the Configuring and Verifying a Virtual IP Address The following example shows how to configure a virtual IP address. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.2 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.3 The following example shows how to verify a virtual IP address configuration. NOTE: In the following example, the primary IP address and the virtual IP addresses are on the same subnet.
• Configure the priority for the VRRP group. INTERFACE -VRID mode priority priority The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 100. Examples of the priority Command DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/1-vrid-111)#priority 125 To verify the VRRP group priority, use the show vrrp command. Dellshow vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.10.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.
Examples of the authentication-type Command The bold section shows the encryption type (encrypted) and the password. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type ? DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type simple 7 force10 The following example shows verifying the VRRP authentication configuration using the show conf command. The bold section shows the encrypted password.
Changing the Advertisement Interval By default, the MASTER router transmits a VRRP advertisement to all members of the VRRP group every one second, indicating it is operational and is the MASTER router. If the VRRP group misses three consecutive advertisements, the election process begins and the BACKUP virtual router with the highest priority transitions to MASTER.
Track an Interface or Object You can set Dell EMC Networking OS to monitor the state of any interface according to the virtual group. Each VRRP group can track up to 12 interfaces and up to 20 additional objects, which may affect the priority of the VRRP group. If the tracked interface goes down, the VRRP group’s priority decreases by a default value of 10 (also known as cost). If the tracked interface’s state goes up, the VRRP group’s priority increases by 10.
• (Optional) Display the configuration of tracked objects in VRRP groups on a specified interface. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show running-config interface interface Examples of Configuring and Viewing the track Command The following example shows how to configure tracking using the track command. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#vrrp-group 111 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-111)#track Tengigabitethernet 1/2/1 The following example shows how to verify tracking using the show conf command.
The following example shows verifying the VRRP configuration on an interface. DellEMC#show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 1/8/1 interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/8/1 no ip address ipv6 address 2007::30/64 vrrp-ipv6-group 1 track 2 priority-cost 20 track 3 priority-cost 30 virtual-address 2007::1 virtual-address fe80::1 no shutdown Setting VRRP Initialization Delay When configured, VRRP is enabled immediately upon system reload or boot.
Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP. This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes.
Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 2/31/1 R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-te-2/31/1)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31/1 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 99 priority 200 virtual-address 10.1.1.
Figure 175. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address fe80::10 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address 1::10 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-10)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#show config interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 ipv6 address 1::1/64 vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: f
VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Scenario The following example shows how to enable VRRP in a non-VLAN. The following example shows a typical use case in which you create three virtualized overlay networks by configuring three VRFs in two switches. The default gateway to reach the Internet in each VRF is a static route with the next hop being the virtual IP address configured in VRRP. In this scenario, a single VLAN is associated with each VRF.
S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#ip address 10.10.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in S1(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-101)#priority 100 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/1-vrid-101)#virtual-address S1(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no shutdown ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/1 S1(conf-if-te-1/2/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-2 S1(conf-if-te-1/2/1)#ip address 10.10.1.
! S2(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3/1 S2(conf-if-te-1/3/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S2(conf-if-te-1/3/1)#ip address 20.1.1.6/24 S2(conf-if-te-1/3/1)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S2(conf-if-te-1/3/1-vrid-105)#priority 100 S2(conf-if-te-1/3/1-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.
DellEMC#show vrrp vrf vrf1 vlan 400 -----------------Vlan 400, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 1 vrf1 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 278, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) DellEMC#show vrrp vrf vrf2 port-channel 1 -----------------Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.
S2(conf-if-vl-300)#no shutdown DellEMC#show vrrp vrf vrf1 vlan 400 -----------------Vlan 400, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 1 vrf1 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 278, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Vlan 400, IPv4 VRID: 10, Version: 2, Net: 20.1.1.
Figure 177. VRRP for IPv6 Topology NOTE: This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. Be sure you make the necessary changes to support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on.
NOTE: The virtual IPv6 address you configure should be the same as the IPv6 subnet to which the interface belongs.
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 DellEMC#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 2/8/1 TenGigabitEthernet 2/8/1, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 110, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 120 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1:
Proxy Gateway with VRRP VLT proxy gateway solves the inefficient traffic trombone problem when VLANs are extended between date centers and when VMs are migrated between the two DCs. Starting from Dell EMC Networking OS 9.14.0.0, VRRP provides a much simpler method to solve the traffic trombone problem. This is achieved by configuring same VRRP group IDs to the extended L3 VLANs and VRRP stays active-active across all four VLT nodes even though they are in two different VLT domains.
• The core routers C1 and D1 in local VLT Domain along with C2 and D2 in the remote VLT Domain are part of a Layer 3 cloud. • The core routers C1, D1, C2, D2 are in a VRRP group with the same vrrp-group ID. When a virtual machine running in Server Rack 1 migrates to Server Rack 2, L3 packets for that VM are routed through the default gateway. The following examples show sample configurations of the core routers.
back-up destination 10.16.140.5 system-mac mac-address 00:00:aa:00:00:00 unit-id 1 peer-routing interface port-channel 128 channel member ten 1/1/1 channel member ten 1/1/2 no shutdown int ten 1/5/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 10 mode active no shut int ten 1/4/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 20 mode active no shut interface port-channel 10 vlt-peer-lag po 10 switchport no shutdown interface port-channel 20 vlt-peer-lag po 20 switchport no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.
no shut int ten 1/4/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 20 mode active no shut interface port-channel 10 vlt-peer-lag po 10 switchport no shutdown interface port-channel 20 vlt-peer-lag po 20 switchport no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.3/24 tagged port-channel 10 vrrp-group 10 advertise-interval 60 virtual-ip 100.1.1.254 priority 100 no shutdown int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.1.
no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.4/24 tagged port-channel 10 vrrp-group 10 advertise-interval 60 virtual-ip 100.1.1.254 priority 100 no shutdown int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.1.
63 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device. Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, Level 0 diagnostics verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
EXEC Privilege mode show system brief 3 Start diagnostics on the unit. diag stack-unit stack-unit-number When the tests are complete, the system displays the following message and automatically reboots the unit. DellEMC#00:09:42 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-SU-1.txt Diags completed...
0 0 0 0 1 2 up up absent up up 19275 19275 up up 19275 19275 Speed in RPM The following example shows the diag command (standalone unit). DellEMC#diag stack-unit 1 level0 Warning - diagnostic execution will cause multiple link flaps on the peer side - advisable to shut directly connected ports Proceed with Diags [confirm yes/no]: yes DellEMC#Dec 15 04:14:07: %S4820:0 %DIAGAGT-6-DA_DIAG_STARTED: Starting diags on stack unit 1 00:12:10 : System may take additional time for Driver Init.
Test 4.000 - Psu0 Source Type Test .................................. PASS diagS6000IsPsuGood[954]: ERROR: Psu:1, Power supply is not present. Test 4.001 - Psu1 Source Type Test .................................. NOT PRESENT Test 4 - Psu Source Type Test ....................................... NOT PRESENT Test 5.000 - Psu0 Status Monitor Test ............................... PASS diagS6000PsuStatusMonitorTest[1099]: ERROR: Psu:1, It is not present... Test 5.001 - Psu1 Status Monitor Test ....................
Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test 15 - CPU Sdram Presence Test ................................... 16 - CPU Sdram Size Test ...................................... 17.000 - System Cpld Access Test ............................... 17.001 - Master Cpld Access Test ............................... 17.002 - Slave Cpld Access Test ................................ 17 - Cpld Access Test .......................................... 18 - CFast Presence Test .......................................
QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 CheckCodeBase = 0x26 Serial ID Extended Fields BR max = 0 BR min = 0 Vendor SN = QC050955 Datecode = 120205 CheckCodeExt = 0x2b QSFP 52 Diagnostic Information =================================== QSFP 52 Rx Power measurement type =================================== QSFP 52 Temp High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Voltage High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Bias High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 RX Power High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Temp Low Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Volt
Minor Off Minor Major Off Major Shutdown Unit2 55 60 75 80 85 ---------------------------------------------------------------Minor Off Minor Major Off Major Shutdown Unit3 55 60 75 80 85 Troubleshoot an Over-temperature Condition To troubleshoot an over-temperature condition, use the following information. 1 Use the show environment commands to monitor the temperature levels. 2 Check air flow through the system. Ensure that the air ducts are clean and that all fans are working correctly.
OID String OID Name Description NOTE: These OIDs only generate if you enable the enable opticinfo-update-interval is enabled command. Hardware MIB Buffer Statistics .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.4 dellNetFpPacketBufferTable View the modular packet buffers details per stack unit and the mode of allocation. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.5 dellNetFpStatsPerPortTable View the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer usage per port per stack unit. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.
Troubleshooting Packet Loss The show hardware stack-unit command is intended primarily to troubleshoot packet loss. To troubleshoot packet loss, use the following commands.
HOL DROPS(TOTAL) HOL DROPS on COS0 HOL DROPS on COS1 HOL DROPS on COS2 HOL DROPS on COS3 HOL DROPS on COS4 HOL DROPS on COS5 HOL DROPS on COS6 HOL DROPS on COS7 HOL DROPS on COS8 HOL DROPS on COS9 HOL DROPS on COS10 HOL DROPS on COS11 HOL DROPS on COS12 HOL DROPS on COS13 HOL DROPS on COS14 HOL DROPS on COS15 HOL DROPS on COS16 HOL DROPS on COS17 TxPurge CellErr Aged Drops --- Egress MAC counters--Egress FCS Drops --- Egress FORWARD PROCESSOR IPv4 L3UC Aged & Drops TTL Threshold Drops INVALID VLAN CNTR Drop
11 0 28 0 0 0 29 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 31 0 0 0 32 0 0 0 33 0 0 0 34 0 0 0 35 0 0 0 36 0 0 0 37 0 0 0 38 0 0 0 39 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 41 0 0 0 42 0 0 0 43 0 0 0 44 0 0 0 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 124904297 0 0 0 2144
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 46 47 48 49 49 49 49 52 52 52 52 53 53 53 53 54/1 54/2 54/3 54/4 Internal Internal 46 0 0 0 47 0 0 0 48 0 0 0 49 0 0 0 50 0 0 0 51 0 0 0 52 0 0 0 61 0 0 0 62 0 0 0 63 0 0 0 64 0 0 0 65 0 0 0 66 0 0 0 67 0 0 0 68 0 0 0 69 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 71 0 0 0 72 0 0 0 53 0 0 0 57 4659499 0 0 Dataplane Statist
rxFwdError :0 rxDatapathErr :0 rxPkt(COS0 ) :0 rxPkt(COS1 ) :0 rxPkt(COS2 ) :0 rxPkt(COS3 ) :0 rxPkt(COS4 ) :0 rxPkt(COS5 ) :0 rxPkt(COS6 ) :0 rxPkt(COS7 ) :0 rxPkt(COS8 ) :773 rxPkt(COS9 ) :0 rxPkt(COS10) :0 rxPkt(COS11) :0 rxPkt(UNIT0) :773 transmitted :12698 txRequested :12698 noTxDesc :0 txError :0 txReqTooLarge :0 txInternalError :0 txDatapathErr :0 txPkt(COS0 ) :0 txPkt(COS1 ) :0 txPkt(COS2 ) :0 txPkt(COS3 ) :0 txPkt(COS4 ) :0 txPkt(COS5 ) :0 txPkt(COS6 ) :0 txPkt(COS7 ) :0 txPkt(COS8 ) :0 txPkt(COS9
Output 00.06 Mbits/sec, DellEMC# 8 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Display Stack Member Counters You can use the show hardware command to display internal receive and transmit statistics, based on the selected command option. The following example is a sample of the output for the counters option.
TX - Fragment counter Interface Te 1/1/1 : Description RX - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV4 L3 routed multicast Packets RX - IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter --------------------Interface Fo 1/60 : Description RX - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV4 L3 routed multicast Packets RX - IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV6 L3 routed multicast Packets RX - Unicast Packet Counter RX - 64 Byte Frame Counter RX - 64 to 127 Byte Frame Counter RX - 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter RX - 256 to 511 Byte Frame
Example of Displaying Counter Information for a Specific Interface DellEMC#show hardware counters interfac tengigabitethernet 5/1/1 unit: 0 port: 2 (interface Te 5/1/1) Description Value RX - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV4 L3 Routed Multicast Packets RX - IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV6 L3 Routed Multicast Packets RX - Unicast Packet Counter RX - 64 Byte Frame Counter RX - 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter RX - 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter RX - 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter RX - 512 to 1023 Byt
Mini Core Dumps Dell EMC Networking OS supports mini core dumps on the application and kernel crashes. The mini core dump applies to Master, Standby, and Member units. Application and kernel mini core dumps are always enabled. The mini core dumps contain the stack space and some other minimal information that you can use to debug a crash. These files are small files and are written into flash until space is exhausted. When the flash is full, the write process is stopped.
The tcpdump command has a finite run process. When you enable the tcpdump command, it runs until the capture-duration timer and/or the packet-count counter threshold is met. If you do not set a threshold, the system uses a default of a 5 minute capture-duration and/or a single 1k file as the stopping point for the dump. You can use the capture-duration timer and the packet-count counter at the same time. The TCP dump stops when the first of the thresholds is met.
64 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell EMC Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
SFF-8431 SFP+ Direct Attach Cable (10GSFP+Cu) MTU 9,216 bytes RFC and I-D Compliance Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell EMC Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 138.
R F C # Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 24 Definition of 7.7.1 74 the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 26 PPP over 15 SONET/SDH 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 26 A Two Rate 9 Three Color 8 Marker 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.
General IPv4 Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general IPv4 protocols. Table 139. General IPv4 Protocols RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 791 Internet Protocol 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 826 An Ethernet Address Resolution 7.6.1 Protocol 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
General IPv6 Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general IPv6 protocols. Table 140. General IPv6 Protocols RFC # Full Name S-Series 1886 DNS Extensions to support IP 7.8.1 version 6 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 1981 Path MTU Discovery for IP (Part version 6 ial) 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for BGP protocols. Table 141. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) RFC# Full Name S-Series/ZSeries S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1997 BGP ComAmtturnibituitees 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2385 Protection of BGP Sessions via the TCP MD5 Signature Option 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2439 BGP Route Flap Damping 7.8.
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for OSPF protocol. Table 142. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) RFC # Full Name S-Series/ZSeries S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1587 The OSPF Not-SoStubby Area (NSSA) Option 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2154 OSPF with Digital Signatures 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2370 The OSPF Opaque LSA Option 7.6.1 9.8(0.
RFC# Full Name S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 3784 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) Extensions in Support of Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 5120 MT-ISIS: Multi Topology (MT) 9.8(0.0P2) Routing in Intermediate System to Intermediate Systems (ISISs) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 5306 Restart Signaling for IS-IS 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
Multicast The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for Multicast protocol. Table 145. Multicast RFC# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 3 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.
RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) dot1dTpLearnedEntryDiscards object] 1724 RIP Version 2 MIB Extension 1850 OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2011 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 9.8(0.
RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Internet-standard Network Management Framework 2578 Structure of Management Information Version 2 (SMIv2) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2579 Textual Conventions for SMIv2 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2580 Conformance Statements for SMIv2 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3434 Remote Monitoring MIB 7.6.1 Extensions for High Capacity Alarms, High-Capacity Alarm Table (64 bits) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3580 IEEE 802.
RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 9.2(0.0) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) isisISAdjIPAddrTable isisISAdjProtSuppTable draftietfnetmod interfac escfg-03 Defines a YANG data model for the configuration of network interfaces. Used in the Programmatic Interface RESTAPI feature. IEEE 802.1A B Management Information Base 7.7.1 module for LLDP configuration, statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.
RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) FORCE Force10 E-Series Enterprise 10Chassis MIB CHASS IS-MIB 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) FORCE Force10 File Copy MIB (supporting 7.7.1 10SNMP SET operation) COPYCONFI G-MIB 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON FORCE Force10 Textual Convention 10-TCMIB 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) FORCE Force10 Trap Alarm MIB 10TRAPALARM -MIB 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) ONENT -MIB MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.
65 X.509v3 supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • Introduction to X.509v3 certificates • X.509v3 support in • Information about installing CA certificates • Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) • Information about installing trusted certificates • Transport layer security (TLS) • Online Certificate Status Protocol (OSCP) • Verifying certificates • Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.
1 An entity or organization that wants a digital certificate requests one through a CSR. 2 To request a digital certificate through a CSR, a key pair is generated and the CSR is signed using the secret private key. The CSR contains information identifying the applicant and the applicant's public key. This public key is used to verify the signature of the CSR and the Distinguished Name (DN). 3 This CSR is sent to a Certificate Authority (CA).
The Root CA generates a private key and a self-signed CA certificate. The Intermediate CA generates a private key and a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). Using its private key, the root CA signs the intermediate CA’s CSR generating a CA certificate for the Intermediate CA. This intermediate CA can then sign certificates for hosts in the network and also for further intermediate CAs.
During the initial TLS protocol negotiation, both participating parties also check to see if the other’s certificate is revoked by the CA. To do this check, the devices query the CA’s designated OCSP responder on the network. The OCSP responder information is included in the presented certificate, the Intermediate CA inserts the info upon signing it, or it may be statically configured on the host. Information about installing CA certificates Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to download and install X.
If you do not specify the cert-file option, the system prompts you to enter metadata information related to the CSR as follows: You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request. What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN. There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank. For some fields there will be a default value; if you enter '.', the field will be left blank.
NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell EMC Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS. This trusted certificate is also presented to the TLS server implementations that require client authentication such as Syslog.
TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS compression is disabled by default. TLS session resumption is also supported to reduce processor and traffic overhead due to public key cryptographic operations and handshake traffic. However, the maximum time allowed for a TLS session to resume without repeating the TLS authentication or handshake process is configurable with a default of 1 hour.
NOTE: If you have an IPv6 address in the URL, then enclose this address in square brackets. For example, http:// [1100::203]:6514. Configuring OCSP behavior You can configure how the OCSP requests and responses are signed when the CA or the device contacts the OCSP responders. To configure this behavior, follow this step: In CONFIGURATION mode, enter the following command: crypto x509 ocsp {[nonce] [sign-request]} Both the none and sign-request parameters are optional.
Verifying Server certificates Verifying server certificates is mandatory in the TLS protocol. As a result, all TLS-enabled applications require certificate verification, including Syslog servers. The system checks the Server certificates against installed CA certificates. NOTE: As part of the certificate verification, the hostname or IP address of the server is verified against the hostname or IP address specified in the application.
